Panasonic KX-TD1232, KX-TVP100 telephone system, KX-T 7230, 7235, 7250 proprietary telephone, KX-T 7240 DSS console User manual
Below you will find brief information for telephone system KX-TD1232, telephone system KX-TVP100, proprietary telephone KX-T 7230, proprietary telephone KX-T 7235, proprietary telephone KX-T 7250, DSS console KX-T 7240. This manual covers basic, optional, and programmable features of the Panasonic telephone system. It explains conditions, connection references, programming, related features, and operation of each feature. You can use this resource to understand the capabilities of your newly purchased system and explore various features for improved communication.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Section 3
Features
This section describes every basic, optional, and programmable features in alphabetical order. It also provides information about the conditions, connection references, programming required, related features, and operation for every feature.
3-2
A
3 Features
A
bsent Message Capability
Description Once set this option provides a message, on the display of the calling extension, to show the reason for the called extension’s absence. Nine messages can be programmed as desired which are available for every extension user. There are six pre-programmed default messages. Setting or cancelling a message can be done by individual extension users but only callers with a display telephone can receive the message.
Conditions • Six default messages, which are changeable, are shown below. The
“%” means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at individual extension.
(1) Will Return Soon
(2) Gone Home
(3) At Ext %%% (extension number)
(4) Back at %% : %% (hour : minute)
(5) Out Until %% / %% (month / day or day / month)
(6) In a Meeting
• An extension user can select only one message at a time. The selected message is displayed every time the user goes off-hook.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[008] Absent Messages
[100] Flexible Numbering, Absent message
[990] System Additional Information, Field (41)
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Absent Message Capability
A
ccount Code Entry
Description An account code is used to identify incoming and outgoing outside for accounting and billing purposes. The account code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record. For incoming outside call, account codes are optional. For outgoing outside call there are three modes available to enter an account code: Verified-All Calls mode; Verified Toll Restriction Override mode; and Option mode. One mode is selected for each extension on a Class of Service basis.
Features
3 Features
A
In Verified-All Calls mode, the user must always enter a preassigned account code when making any of the following calls unless it has previously been stored in memory:
• Call Forwarding – to CO Line
• Last Number Redial
• Line Access
• Notebook Function
• One-Touch Dialing
• Pickup Dialing
• Saved Number Redial
• Station Speed Dialing
• System Speed Dialing
In Verified-Toll Restriction Override mode, the user can enter a preassigned account code only when the user needs to override toll restriction.
In Option mode, the user can enter any account code when needed.
Conditions • An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing (System / Station
Speed Dialing; Notebook Function; One-Touch Dialing; Pickup
Dialing; Call Forwarding – to CO Line).
• The Account button may be used in place of the feature number. A flexible button on the proprietary telephone set can be programmed as the Account button.
• If the account code stored in location 01 of the programming table is used, the dialed number is not printed out to SMDR (Private Call).
• Account code entry after CPC detection must be done within 15 seconds. Otherwise, SMDR call record is activated and entry becomes impossible afterwards.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry
[105] Account Codes
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Account Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Account Code Entry
Features 3-3
A
3 Features
A
lternate Calling – Ring / Voice
Description This system offers two methods of Intercom Calling: Ring-Calling or Voice-Calling. Ring-Calling informs the called party of an incoming call with a ring tone, while the Voice-Calling uses the calling party’s voice. The called extension user, if a proprietary telephone, can select tone or voice calling. If the user selects
Voice-Calling, the calling party can talk to the user immediately after confirmation tone. The calling extension user is able to change the calling method pre-selected once at a time by the called extension by pressing “ ”; Ring-Calling can be switched to
Voice-Calling, and vice versa. This operation is available for both proprietary and single line telephone users during calling.
Conditions Single line telephone users can only receive Ring-Calling call.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Intercom Alerting Assignment
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Handsfree Answerback
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice
A
lert Indication
Description
Conditions
3-4 Features
If the following situations occur, the pre-warning indication is displayed on the proprietary telephone of Operator 1 in Day mode.
Memory; When the system finds the wrong system data, the indication “S.–Datenfehler 1” is displayed.
Printer; When the paper of the printer for SMDR runs out or the printer is out-of-service, the indication “Drucker prüfen” is displayed. Check the printer.
Connection*; When a system inter-connection error occurs and system connection operation is interrupted, the indication
“Sys.–Link–Fehler” is displayed. Connect the interface between the systems and press the Reset Button on both systems.
None
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3 Features
Programming Reference
No Programming required.
Feature Reference None
Operation References Operator Service Features,
—User Manual Alert Indication
A
A
nswering, Direct CO Line
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to answer an incoming call by simply pressing the appropriate CO button without lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button. The user can specify the line to be answered when multiple incoming lines are ringing.
Conditions None
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Answering, Direct CO Line
A
utomatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
Description Allows the caller to be informed when the called party has completed the current call.
Automatic Callback – Extension
If the caller answers the callback ringing, the called extension automatically starts ringing again.
Automatic Callback – CO Line
If the caller answers the callback ringing, the line is automatically selected to allow the user to make an outside call.
Conditions • If the callback ringing is not answered in four rings (within 10 seconds) the callback is cancelled.
• More than one extension user can set this function for the same extension or CO line.
Features 3-5
A
3 Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic callback busy cancel
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
A
utomatic Configuration
†
Description The system sends the VPS data which contains the extension number configuration information and the VPS automatically creates mailboxes with this data (Quick Setup).
Conditions
The data is transmitted to the VPS on the lowest jack port.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References
Not applicable.
A
utomatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer
Description When Operator 1 is busy and the outside call reaches the Operator
1 directly, the incoming call can be waited until the waiting queue is over assigned number. When the incoming call is over assigned number, the last call will be transferred to the Operator 2.
(Automatic Overflow)
Operator 1 can refer the waiting queue with the indicator of the
Hurry-Up button, and transfer the first waiting call to the preassigned extension with the Hurry-Up button. (Hurry-Up Transfer)
Conditions
3-6 Features
• Automatic Overflow does not function in the following cases; a) The waiting queue is set “0.” b) Operator 2 is not set.
c) Operator 1 belongs to Station Hunting Group.
• Hurry-Up Transfer does not function in the following cases; a) The waiting queue is set “0.” b) Hurry-Up Button is not assigned.
c) Operator 1 belongs to Station Hunting Group.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
3 Features
A
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[120] Operator Queue
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment, Hurry-Up Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Operator
Operation References Operator Service Features,
—User Manual Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer
A
utomatic Station Release
Description After going off-hook, if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a specified time period, the user will be disconnected from the line after reorder tone is sent. To get a line again, the user must go back on-hook and then off-hook.
Conditions This function works in the following cases:
When making a call
(1)The first digit has not been dialed within 10 seconds.
(2)After a digit is dialed, the next one is not dialed within five seconds (Intercom call only).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
B
ackground Music (BGM)
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to listen to background music from the monitor speaker on the telephone.
Conditions • The system has an internal or external music source. It may be required to connect a user-supplied music source. Up to two sources can be connected per system.
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features 3-7
AB
3 Features
It is required to select the internal or external music source by System
Programming for the music source 1.
• It is required to select a music source used for BGM by System
Programming.
• The BGM is interrupted while off-hooked.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.10 External Music Source Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[803] Music Source Use
[990] System Additional Information, Field (20)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Music on Hold
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Background Music (BGM)
B
ackground Music (BGM) – External
Description Background music (BGM) can be broadcasted in your office through external pagers. The BGM can be turned on and off by
Operator.
Conditions • It is required to connect an external pager and an external music source. These are user-supplied item. Up to two pagers and up to two external music sources can be installed per system. Two different music sources can be used for each BGM and Music on Hold.
• Each pager can be programmed to send BGM or not.
• The access priority to external pager is: (1)TAFAS; (2)Paging;
(3)BGM. Higher priorities will override BGM.
• It is programmable to select an internal or external music source for
BGM.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
2.3.10 External Music Source Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Background music – external
3-8 Features
3 Features
[803] Music Source Use
[804] External Pager BGM
[990] System Additional Information, Field (20)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Background Music (BGM)
Operation References Operator Service Features
—User Manual Background Music (BGM) — External
B
B
udget Management
Description Limit the telephone usage to a pre-assigned amount. For example, the limit may be the amount deposited during a hotel at check-in. If the pre-assign limit is reached, the extension user cannot make further calls until he/she receives authorization from the operator.
Conditions None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[010] Budget Management
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port
[990] System Additional Information, Field (39)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
HOTEL APPLICATION
Operation References Not applicable.
B
usy Lamp Field
Description The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the DSS (Direct
Station Selection) buttons, each of which corresponds to a selected extension, tell whether the corresponding extensions are idle, busy or in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode.
Conditions • This function is available for DSS buttons on DSS Consoles and for flexible CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on proprietary telephones.
• A DSS button indicator lights red if the corresponding extension is busy or in DND mode.
Features 3-9
B
3 Features
• The DSS indicator on a proprietary telephone also informs you of incoming calls except for the DIL 1:N and doorphone call to the corresponding extensions. You can pick up calls by pressing the corresponding flashing DSS buttons.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Button, Direct Station
Selection (DSS)
Operation References Not applicable.
DSS Console (KX-T7240)
B
usy Station Signaling (BSS)
Description When attempting to call a busy extension, Busy Station Signaling allows you to signal the user on the phone to answer your call. The called extension user hears a Call Waiting tone and is able to answer the call.
Conditions • This feature is effective when the called extension has enabled Call
Waiting. If Call Waiting is enabled, the caller will hear ringback tone; if not, the caller will hear reorder tone.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Waiting
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
B
utton, Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Description The proprietary telephone user can access other extension users with one touch of this button.
3-10 Features
3 Features
B
Conditions • A flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone can be assigned as a
DSS button using either System or Station Programming.
• DSS buttons are provided on DSS Consoles with default setting.
Changing the setting is possible from the paired telephone using Station
Programming.
• Once a button is assigned as a DSS button, it provides Busy Lamp Field
(BLF) status.
• The mode of a DSS button can be programmed to disconnect the CO line and calls the extension or hold and transfer the call to the extension
(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Busy Lamp Field
DSS Console (KX-T7240)
Operation References Basic Operation,
—User Manual Making Calls
PT Features,
Call Transfer – to Extension
DSS Console Features,
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Buttons
One-Touch Transfer by DSS
Button
B
utton, Flexible
Description The use of flexible buttons is determined by either System or
Station Programming. The following three types of flexible buttons are provided on proprietary telephones (PT) and DSS Consoles:
• Flexible CO buttons (provided on PT only)
• Flexible DSS buttons (provided on DSS Console only)
• Programmable Feature (PF) buttons
(provided on DSS Console only)
Features 3-11
B
3 Features
The below-mentioned table shows all of the features which can be assigned to flexible buttons.
In the table, “ ✔ ” indicates that the feature can be assigned to the button.
Button
Features to be assigned
Single CO
Group CO
Loop CO
Alert
Hurry-Up
Log-In / Log-Out
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Live Call Screening
†
Live Call Screening Cancel
†
Message Waiting
Two-Way Record
†
Two-Way Transfer
†
Account Code Entry
Conference
FWD/DND
One-Touch Dialing
Saved Number Redial
Terminate
Voice Mail Transfer
CO
(PT)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
DSS
(DSS)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
PF
(DSS)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Conditions • A CO line can only appear on one Single-CO button of any given telephone. A station can only appear on one DSS button of any given telephone or DSS Console.
• It is possible to have multiple appearances of the same Group-CO or
Loop-CO buttons on the same telephone. Incoming and outgoing calls on the line are shown on the button in the following priority:
Single-CO > Group-CO > Loop-CO
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment
3-12 Features †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
3 Features
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Buttons on Proprietary Telephones DSS Console (KX-T7240)
Operation References Not applicable.
B
B
utton, Group-CO (G-CO)
Description To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a group of CO lines
(CO line group) can be assigned to a CO button. This assignment is referred as to Group-CO (G-CO). Any incoming call from any
CO line in the CO line group arrives at the G-CO button. To make a CO call, the user can access an idle CO line in the group by simply pressing the dedicated G-CO button.
Conditions • No G-CO button is originally provided on a proprietary telephone (PT).
It is programmable on a CO button by either System or Station
Programming.
• It is needed to program the extension for receiving and / or originating calls on CO lines.
• It is possible to assign the same CO line group to more than one G-CO buttons on the same PT.
• It is possible to assign the same line to an S-CO button and to a G-CO button.
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be selected on an extension–CO line basis.
• The PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each
G-CO button by System or Station Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Answering, Direct CO Line
CO Line Group
Line Access, CO Line Group
Line Access, Direct
Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Buttons
Features 3-13
B
3
Operation References Basic Operation,
—User Manual Making Calls
PT Features,
Answering, Direct CO Line
Receiving Calls
Outward Dialing – Line Access, CO Line Group
Features
B
utton, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Description All CO lines can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone (PT). The assigned button serves as a Loop-
CO (L-CO) button. An incoming call on any CO line arrives at the
L-CO, unless there is an S-CO or G-CO button associated with the line or unless the button is already in use. To make an outside call, the PT user can simply press the dedicated L-CO button.
Conditions • No L-CO button is originally provided on a PT. A flexible CO button can be assigned as an L-CO button in either System or Station
Programming.
• Pressing the L-CO button provides the same operation as entering the automatic line access code.
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be selected on an extension–CO line basis.
• The PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each
L-CO button by System or Station Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Loop-CO (L-CO) Button
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Answering, Direct CO Line
Line Access, Automatic
Line Access, Direct
Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Buttons
Operation References Basic Operation,
—User Manual Making Calls
PT Features,
Receiving Calls
Outward Dialing – Line Access, Automatic
3-14 Features
3 Features
B
B
utton, Single CO (S-CO)
Description A Single-CO (S-CO) button is a CO line access button. This allows the proprietary telephone user to access a specific line by pressing an S-CO button. An incoming call can be directed to an S-
CO button.
Conditions • An S-CO button provides CO Line status.
• It is possible to assign one CO line to both an S-CO and a G-CO button.
• Incoming calls appear on the proprietary telephone, when an extension is assigned as the incoming call destination and an S-CO, G-CO and/or
L-CO button is assigned.
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be selected on an extension–CO line basis.
• The proprietary telephone user can choose a desired ringing tone type for the S-CO button by System or Station Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Answering, Direct CO Line
Line Access, Direct
Line Access, Individual
Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Buttons
Operation References Basic Operation,
—User Manual
Making Calls
PT Features,
Receiving Calls
Outward Dialing – Line Access, Individual
Features 3-15
B
3 Features
B
uttons on Proprietary Telephones
Description Proprietary telephones are provided with the feature / line access buttons listed below:
Proprietary Telephones KX-T:
Buttons
AUTO ANSWER / MUTE †
AUTO DIAL / STORE †
CO † *
CONF †
FLASH
Function
FWD / DND †
HOLD
INTERCOM †
MESSAGE †
MONITOR
PAUSE
PROGRAM
REDIAL
SHIFT †
Soft
SP-PHONE †
TRANSFER
VOLUME
7230
✔
✔
✔ (24)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔(3)
✔
✔
✔
7235
✔
✔
✔ (12)
✔
✔
✔(10)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔(3)
✔
✔
✔
7250
✔!
✔ (6)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ : The button is provided on the designated telephones.
† : The button is provided with Light Emitting Diode (LED).
* : The buttons which can be changed to function as a feature button are called flexible buttons.
(x) : Shows the number of buttons only if multiple buttons are provided.
! : The button is provided without an LED.
The functions of the listed buttons are described below:
AUTO ANSWER / MUTE: This dual function button is used for extension auto-answer and microphone mute during a conversation.
AUTO DIAL / STORE: Used for System Speed Dialing and storing program changes.
CO (Central Office line): Can make or receive an outgoing call or can be re-assigned to a different CO or to various feature buttons.
CONF (Conference): Used to establish a three-party conference.
FLASH: Sends a flash signal to the Central Office or a host PBX to access their features (External Feature Access).
Function: Used to perform the displayed function / operation.
3-16 Features
3 Features
B
FWD / DND (Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb): Used to program Call Forwarding and set Do Not Disturb.
HOLD: Used to place a call on hold.
INTERCOM: Used to make or receive intercom calls.
MESSAGE: Used to send a message or display current message.
MONITOR: Used for handsfree operation.
PAUSE: Inserts a pause in a speed dial number.
PROGRAM: Used to enter and exit Programming mode. With the
KX-T7250, it can be also used as the PAUSE button.
REDIAL: Used for Last Number or Automatic Redial.
SHIFT: Used to access the second level of Soft button function.
Soft: Pressing a Soft button performs the function / operation appearing on the bottom line of the display.
SP-PHONE (Speakerphone): Used for handsfree operation.
Pressing the button causes the telephone to switch between handset and handsfree operation.
TRANSFER: Transfers a call to another extension or external destination.
VOLUME: Used to adjust the ringer and speaker volume and the display contrast.
Conditions • Certain buttons are equipped with light indicators (LED’s) to show line or feature status.
• CO buttons can be classified as the following three types:
Single-CO (S-CO) button / Group-CO (G-CO) button / Loop-CO
(L- CO) button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment
Feature References None
Operation References Refer to respective operating instructions.
—User Manual
Features 3-17
C
3 Features
C
ALL FORWARDING FEATURES – SUMMARY
Description Call forwarding features enable you to have your calls forwarded to a specified destination. You may specify the circumstances under which your calls are forwarded. The following Call Forwarding features are available:
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Call Forwarding – Follow Me
Call Forwarding – No Answer
Call Forwarding – to CO Line
C
all Forwarding – All Calls
Description This feature is used when you want all your calls to be automatically re-directed to another extension.
Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are:
CO calls – DDI; DIL 1:1; DIL 1:N; Intercept Routing
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding feature is not activated to the following destination extensions; a) The extension is also in Call Forwarding. b) The extension is in DND mode.
• Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension.
• If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group, a call directed to the extension is forwarded. Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group.
• Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding functions, if any.
• A floating station cannot be programmed as the forwarding destination.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / Do not disturb
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References None
Operation References
PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Forwarding — All Calls
3-18 Features
3 Features
C
C
all Forwarding – Busy
Description A call directed to your extension is forwarded to another extension when your telephone is busy.
Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are:
Outside calls – DDI; DIL 1:1; DIL 1:N; Intercept Routing
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding feature is not activated to the following destination extensions; a) The extension is also in Call Forwarding. b) The extension is in DND mode.
• Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The
MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension.
• If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group, a call directed to the extension is forwarded. Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group.
• Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding functions, if any.
• A floating station cannot be programmed as the forwarding destination.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / Do not disturb
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Forwarding — Busy
C
all Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Description Your calls are forwarded to another extension when your extension is busy or you do not answer the call in a pre-determined time.
Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are:
Outside calls – DDI; DIL 1:1; DIL 1:N; Intercept Routing
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• This function operates the same way as Call Forwarding – Busy and
Call Forwarding – No Answer.
Features 3-19
C
3 Features
• There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding feature is not activated to the following destination extensions; a) The extension is also in Call Forwarding. b) The extension is in DND mode.
• Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension.
• If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group, a call directed to the extension is forwarded. Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group.
• Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding functions, if any.
• A floating station cannot be programmed as the forwarding destination.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – Busy Call Forwarding – No Answer
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Forwarding — Busy / No Answer
C
all Forwarding – Follow Me
Description When you forget to set Call Forwarding – All Calls before you leave your desk or when you move from pre-set place to another, this allows you to set the same function from the destination extension.
Conditions • Same as the conditions of Call Forwarding – All Calls.
• It is programmable to enable or disable this feature on Class of Service basis.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[991] COS Additional Information, Field (1)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD / DND Button
3-20 Features
3 Features
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Forwarding — Follow Me
C
C
all Forwarding – No Answer
Description Calls to your extension are forwarded to another extension when you do not answer the call in a pre-determined time.
Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are:
Outside calls – DDI; DIL 1:1; DIL 1:N; Intercept Routing
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• This function operates if an incoming call is not answered in a specific period of time. Therefore, this function also applies if your extension is busy and cannot answer the incoming call within the time.
• There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding feature is not activated to the following destination extensions; a) The extension is also in Call Forwarding. b) The extension is in DND mode.
• Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension.
• If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group, a call directed to the extension is forwarded. Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group.
• Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding functions, if any.
• A floating station cannot be programmed as the forwarding destination.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Forwarding — No Answer
Features 3-21
C
3 Features
C
all Forwarding – to CO Line
Description Calls directed to your extension will be sent to an external destination. The outside telephone number must be preprogrammed.
Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are:
Outside calls – DIL 1:1; DDI (ISDN Service only)
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• The forwarding extension’s Toll Restriction and Account Code Entry requirements still apply.
• Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension.
• If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded. Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group.
• Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding functions, if any.
• Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to perform the function.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Forwarding — to CO Line
C
all Hold – CO Line
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to put an outside call on hold.
The held call can be retrieved from the user who held it or from any other extension.
Conditions • Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall results.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 15 minutes, it is automatically disconnected.
3-22 Features
3 Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Hold Recall
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Call Hold
Music on Hold
C
C
all Hold – Intercom
Description This is used to place an intercom call on hold for the proprietary telephone user. The held call can be retrieved from the user who held it or from any other extension.
Conditions • Only one intercom call can be placed on hold in a telephone at a time.
Outside calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same time.
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall results.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Park
Hold Recall
Music on Hold
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Call Hold
C
all Hold, Exclusive – CO Line
Description Allows the extension user to prevent any other extension users from retrieving a held outside call. Only the user who held it can retrieve the call.
Features 3-23
C
3 Features
Conditions • If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall results. After Hold Recall results, the held call can be retrieved from any other extension.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 15 minutes, it is automatically disconnected.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
• With a single line telephone, either one outside or intercom call can be held.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Hold Recall
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Hold, Exclusive
Music on Hold
C
all Hold, Exclusive – Intercom
Description Allows the extension user to prevent any other extension users from retrieving a held intercom call. Only the user who held it can retrieve the call.
Conditions • Only one intercom call can be placed on Call Hold or Exclusive Call
Hold at a time.
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall results. After Hold Recall results, the held call can be retrieved from any other extension.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Hold Recall
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Hold, Exclusive
Music on Hold
3-24 Features
3 Features
C
all Hold Retrieve – CO Line
Description Allows the extension user to retrieve a specified outside call that has been placed on hold by another extension, except for the exclusive hold.
Conditions Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the feature number. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Hold retrieve – CO line
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Hold – CO Line
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Hold Retrieve
C
C
all Hold Retrieve – Intercom
Description Allows the extension user to retrieve a call that has been placed on hold by another extension, except for the exclusive hold.
Conditions Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the feature number. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Hold retrieve – intercom
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Hold – Intercom
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Hold Retrieve
Features 3-25
C
3 Features
C
all Log, Incoming
Description Provides the external calling party's information on the display proprietary telephone when the extension user does not answer the call. The phone number and name can be displayed when the number and the name are stored in list of System Speed Dialing.
The stored number or modified number, if needed can be used to call back the party. This feature is available, if the Caller ID or
Calling Line Identification Presentation service is obtained from the
Central Office.
The displayed information are follows; a) The party's phone number and name b) The day and time of the call was made c) The calling attempt time of the same person d) The receiving CO line number and name
Conditions • Up to 15 calls can be stored on an extension basis. It is programmable to assign whether the 16th call will be unacceptable or the oldest call is replaced by the newest call that is received after 15 calls are stored.
• If the LED indicator of the SHIFT button is red, the user finds that there were some unanswered call.
• This feature is only available for KX-T7235 and KX-T7230.
• It is possible to prevent the other user from referring the call log on the extension. The operator 1 also can set or cancel the prevention remotely (Call Log Lock Control).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call log, incoming, Call log lock control, incoming
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, Operator Features,
—User Manual Call Log, Incoming
Operator Service Features,
Call Log Lock Control, Incoming
3-26 Features
3 Features
C
C
all Park
Description Allows the extension user to place a held call into a system parking area. This releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved from any other extension user.
Conditions • The system contains 10 parking areas, each of which has its own call park number. Up to 10 calls can be parked at the same time in the system. Under the System Connection*, all users may access the same call parking area. The number of holding slots remains at 10.
• If a parked call is not retrieved within Transfer Recall Timer period,
Transfer Recall starts to the operator or the extension that parked the call.
• If Call Park Recall is not retrieved in 15 minutes, it is automatically disconnected.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the parked call is retrieved.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call park / call park retrieve
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (11), (16)
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Park
C
all Pickup, CO Line
Description Allows any extension user to answer an incoming outside call that is ringing at another’s telephone.
Conditions • Call Pickup starts with the lowest CO number.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, CO line
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Features 3-27 * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
C
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Pickup, CO Line
3 Features
C
all Pickup, Directed
Description Allows any extension user to answer a call ringing at any other extension.
Conditions • Doorphone call can be picked up from extensions that are not programmed to answer a doorphone call.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• You can pick up a call by pressing a flashing DSS button assigned on a proprietary telephone.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, directed
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Pickup, Directed
C
all Pickup, Group
Description
Conditions
Allows the extension user to answer a call that is ringing at another telephone, if the call is ringing within the user’s extension group.
• The user can pick up an incoming outside, intercom, or doorphone call.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, group
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Pickup, Group
3-28 Features
3 Features
C
C
all Pickup Deny
Description Allows the user to prohibit other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his / her extension by using the call pickup features.
Conditions Distinctive Dial Tone is sent to the user on the extension with this feature when the user goes off-hook.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup deny
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Pickup, CO Line
Call Pickup, Directed
Call Pickup, Group
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Pickup Deny
C
all Splitting
Description Allows the extension user to alternate between two other parties.
Placing the current call on hold by pressing another CO /
INTERCOM button allows the user to have a conversation with the other party.
Conditions Call Splitting is impossible during Doorphone Call or Paging.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Splitting
Features 3-29
C
3 Features
C
ALL TRANSFER FEATURES – SUMMARY
Description Call Transfer features allow the user to transfer a call to another party. This operation can be screened or unscreened. Screened call transfer is used when you want to announce the call to the other party before completing the transfer. Unscreened call transfer immediately releases the caller to the called party. An intercom or an outside call can be transferred to an extension or to an outside party by:
Call Transfer, Screened – to CO Line
Call Transfer, Screened – to Extension
Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension
C
all Transfer, Screened – to CO Line
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to voice-announce to the external party and transfer the call.
Conditions • Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to perform it.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[990] System Additional Information, Field (1)
Feature References None
Operation Reference PT Features,
—User Manual Call Transfer — to CO Line
C
all Transfer, Screened – to Extension
Description Allows the extension user to voice-announce to the extension and transfer the call.
Conditions None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[990] System Additional Information, Field (1)
3-30 Features
3 Features
Feature References None
Operation Reference PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Transfer — to Extension
C
C
all Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension
Description Allows the user to transfer an intercom or outside to directly transfer to an extension party. After dialing the destination extension, the user replaces the handset while hearing ringback tone.
Conditions • If the destination party does not answer within the transfer recall time, the call will return to the user or operator.
• This function is possible when the destination is sending ringback or busy tone. If the destination is busy, Camp-On Transfer occurs.
• The ringing signal pattern follows the regular ringing pattern depending on the party being transferred: outside or intercom call ringing.
• It is possible for any extension user to transfer a call to the modem* for remote maintenance.
• If music on hold is enabled, music is sent to the party while being transferred. It is system-programmable whether to send ringback tone or music on hold to the caller.
• If the destination party does not answer within the transfer recall time, the call will return to the user or operator.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (1), (11)
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Transfer — to Extension
C
all Waiting
Description While in conversation, a call waiting tone informs the user of another incoming call that is waiting. He or she can answer the second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold.
Call waiting tone can be enabled or disabled by dialing the appropriate feature number.
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features 3-31
C
Conditions
3 Features
• The call waiting tone is generated when an outside call comes in or when an extension caller executes Busy Station Signaling.
• Setting Data Line Security cancels Call Waiting which has been turned on.
• For proprietary telephone users, two types of call waiting tone are provided to prevent them from missing the tone as shown below:
A proprietary telephone user can select the desired type by Station
Programming.
15 s
Tone 1
Tone 2
5 s
Outside Call
IntercomCall
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call waiting
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Call Waiting
C
aller ID
Description Provides the calling party's phone number and/or name of the called party's display proprietary telephone before the called party answers the outside call. If the number and/or name are stored in the list of the System Speed Dialing, the number and/or name are provided. When neither number nor name is stored in the list, the number sent from ISDN is displayed. This feature is one of the
ISDN services.
3-32 Features
3 Features
C
Conditions • Up to 500 entries of number and name can be stored in the list of the
System Speed Dialing by System Programming.
• If the calling party restricts the presentation of calling line identification, neither the phone number nor the name is displayed
(Calling Line Identification Restriction).
• The name is not displayed, when the corresponding stored number includes the Flash and Pause, — (hyphen) or Secret button, following to the line access code and — (hyphen).
• Caller ID will override CO Line Name Display on the extension except the operator extension. The display can be alternated between Caller ID and CO Line Name Display.
Programming Reference
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Display Call Information
C
aller ID to RS-232C Port
Description Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) also automatically records detailed call information in the following cases:
A) When an incoming call occurs.
B) When an incoming call is answered by the extension.
C) When an incoming call disappears because nobody answered it.
If CO lines receive a call, when Caller ID is available, SMDR records the name (14 characters max.).
“Ring” in the SMDR printout format indicates the ring duration of the incoming call in Minutes / Seconds.
Features 3-33
C
Printed call record example:
3 Features
A)
B)
C)
Date Time
24.03.94 10:03
24.03.94 10:11
Ext
201 12345
24.03.94 10:07 203 00001
24.03.94 10:08
24.03.94 10:09 134
Department code CO Dial Number Ring Duration Charge Code CD
01
20
1234567890123456789012 00:05'12 00007. 00FR 12345
<K>*
03 <K>* MARY WARD
00:00'56 00000. 00FR
03 <K>* 0924312111 0'20
03 <K>* 1022220 0'45
RC
AN
NA
*<K> = <INCOMING>
Conditions
Explanation
A) An incoming call from CO line 3 appears when Caller ID is available.
“RC” is the Condition Code for “Receive”.
B) An incoming call from CO line 3 is answered by the extension 134 when Caller ID is not available. It took 20 seconds to answer the call.
“AN” is the Condition Code for “Answer”.
C) An incoming call from CO line 3 disappeared because nobody answered the call within 45 seconds when Caller
ID was not available.
“NA” is the Condition Code for “No Answer”.
• Connect a printer provided with an EIA (RS-232C) interface to the EIA
(RS-232C) connector located on the main unit.
• It is possible to select whether the SMDR prints out the information of incoming calls (RC) and answered incoming calls (AN).
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.10 Printer Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[000] Date and Time Set
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format
[802] System Data Printout
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters
[990] System Additional Information, Field (43)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
3-34 Features
3 Features
Operation References Not applicable.
C
C
alling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Description Allows the extension user to restrict the presentation of the calling party's number to the called party when making a call. This feature is one of the ISDN services.
Conditions If the presentation is enabled, the called party can check the calling party's number before the called party is answered it (Calling Line
Identification Presentation, CLIP – case by case).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, CLIR
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Caller ID
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
C
harge Fee Reference
Description Allows the pre-assigned display telephone user to see, clear charges and print out the data by SMDR. Charges are displayed per extension, CO line, account code, department code, or the total of each can be referred to.
Conditions • The allowed extension is determined by System Programming.
• The verification ID is required to perform this feature.
• The maximum 99999 calls can be collected. The existing call is not referred.
• It is programmable to select the first display, Frequency or Charge by
System Programming. This can be switched manually at each extension.
• Exchange rate between Frequency counter and Charges is assigned by
Station Programming.
Features 3-35
C
3 Features
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by [125]
Assignment of Denomination.
• If the amount exceeds the maximum displayable charge, then only the highest possible charge will be displayed (e.g. 99999.99FR).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[117] Charge Display Selection
[118] Charge Verification Assignment
[119] Charge Verification ID Code Set
[125] Assignment of Denomination
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Charge Fee Reference
Feature References None
Operation References Station Programming,
—User Manual Charge Fee Reference
C
lass of Service (COS)
Description COS is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions. Each extension is assigned a primary and a secondary
COS numbers. Eight Classes of Service are available.
Conditions • The operator can switch the extension's COS between a primary and a secondary.
• A list of the programmable items is given below:
(1) The ability to forward a call to an outside party
(2) The ability to transfer a call to an outside party
(3) The ability to override Do Not Disturb of the called station
(4) Account Code Entry operation – verified - all calls / verified toll restriction override / option
(5) The ability to set Executive Busy Override
(6) The ability to deny Executive Busy Override
(7) Outgoing call restriction level (Day mode / Night mode)
(8) The ability to set Call Forwarding – Follow Me
(9) System speed dialing call restriction level (Day mode / Night mode)
(10) The ability to switch the Day/Night service
(11) The ability to unlock the door opener
(12) The ability to turn on the external relay
(13) The ability to set Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
(14) The ability to set Connected Line Identification Restriction
(15) The ability to set Calling Line Identification Restriction
3-36 Features
3 Features
C
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering Primary COS select, Secondary COS select
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[509]-[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialing–Day/Night
[511] Door Opener Access
[512] External Relay Access
[513] Night Service Access
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction
[601] Class of Service
[613] ISDN Class of Service
[991] COS Additional Information
Feature References None
Operation References Operator Service Features,
—User Manual Class of Service (COS) Switch
C
O Line Connection Assignment
Description This allows you to specify the CO lines connected to your system to prevent an extension user from originating an outside call by selecting a line which is not connected. An idle line is selected from the connected ones when an extension user makes an
Automatic Line Access.
Conditions • If the user tries to make a call with a disconnected line, reorder tone sounds to indicate that the line is out of use.
• This is effective for all outgoing calls.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
Features 3-37
C
3 Features
C
O Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing
Description Allows you to assign the CO line an extension user can use for outgoing calls. This feature is useful to prevent unauthorized toll calls.
Conditions • When an extension user tries to make an outside call on a disallowed
CO line, reorder tone is sent to indicate that the user cannot use the CO line.
• Day and Night Service are individually programmed. (Night Service)
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night for
ISDN Extension
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
C
O Line Group
Description CO lines can be grouped into up to eight CO line groups. This allows extensions to call outside parties without designating a specific CO line, since a CO line is automatically selected from the designated CO line group. All CO lines belonging to a CO line group follow the assignment determined for that CO line group. A list of assignments for each CO line group is shown as follows:
• The destination of Intercept Routing (Day / Night)
• Disconnect Time
• Flash Time
• Host PBX Access Code
• Pause Time (used in Speed Dialing and Flash)
Conditions • Each CO line can only belong to one CO line group.
• CO lines in a CO line group are selected uniformly if all lines belong to the same system.
• If System Connection* is employed, a CO line group can include CO lines in both systems. In this case, a CO line is first selected from the user’s system. If all lines in the user’s system are in use, a line in the other system is selected.
3-38 Features * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3 Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, CO line group line access
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[411] Host PBX Access Codes
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
C
C
O Line Name Display
Description
Conditions
Provide the display proprietary telephone user with the preset CO line name if an incoming outside call arrives at the telephone. The operator may answer the call, after confirming the name of the called destination when the multiple companies or divisions share the system.
• It is required to give names to CO lines by System Programming.
• Caller ID feature will override this feature on the extension except the operator.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[421] CO Line Name Assignment
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
C
onference
Description
Conditions
The system supports three-party conference calls, including outside or inside parties. During a two-party conversation, the extension user can add a third party to their conversation, thereby establishing a conference.
• Possible conference combinations are: 1-inside and 2-outsides; 2-inside and 1-outside; and 3-inside.
• Up to six conference calls are allowed simultaneously.
• A three-party call is also established by Executive Busy Override.
Features 3-39
C
3 Features
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Conference (CONF) Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Executive Busy Override – CO Line
Executive Busy Override – Extension
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Conference
C
onfirmation Tone
Description At the end of many different functions the system confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the extension user through the speaker of the telephone.
Confirmation tone 1:
(a) Indicates that the new setting differs from the previous setting.
(b) Set or cancel the Electronic Station Lockout.
1 s
Confirmation tone 2:
(a) Indicates that the new setting is identical to the previous setting.
(b) In addition, sent when various features are successfully performed or accessed. (e.g. Call Hold; Automatic Callback Busy)
(c) Sent when accessing external paging equipment. (e.g. Paging –
All; Paging – External) Confirmation tone from external pager can be enabled or disabled.
1 s
3-40 Features
3 Features
C
Confirmation tone 3:
Sent when a conversation is established just after dialing.
For example, when accessing the following features by the feature numbers:
• Call Park Retrieve
• Call Pickup
• Hold Retrieve
• Paging / Paging Answer
• TAFAS Answer
This tone can be eliminated by System Programming so that the user can start talking instantly.
1 s
Confirmation tone 4:
Sent when moving from a two-party call to a three-party call, and vice versa. (These are caused by Executive Busy Override or
Conference.) It is possible to eliminate this tone by System
Programming.
1 s
Conditions Confirmation Tone 1 and 2 are provided to reconfirm the assigned feature.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (13), (16)
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
Features 3-41
C
3 Features
C
onnected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
Description Allows the extension user to restrict the presentation of the called party's number to the calling party when the calling party is making the call. This feature is one of the ISDN services.
Conditions If the presentation is enabled, the calling party can check the the called party's number before the called party is answered it (Connected Line
Identification Presentation).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, COLR
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Connected Line Indication Restriction (COLR)
3-42 Features
D
3 Features
D
ata Line Security
Description Data Line Security is a function that can be set by System
Programming. Once set, communication between the extension and the other end is protected from any signal such as Call
Waiting, Hold Recall and from Executive Busy Override. Data equipment or a facsimile may be connected to an extension jack so that the user can perform data communications. During the communication, Data Line Security maintains secure data transmission against tones or barging in from other extensions.
Conditions • Assigning Data Line Security always offers conversation privacy.
• If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security, it applies to the both extensions.
• The Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) feature is not available for incoming calls to the extensions to which the Data Line Security feature is assigned.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[612] Data Line Security
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
D
epartment Codes
Description A department code is used to identify outgoing outside calls on extension basis for accounting and billing purpose. The department code is automatically appended to the Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR) call record without entering the code.
Conditions • The department code is assigned up to 5 digits on an extension basis.
• It is possible to print out the data from SMDR on the department code basis.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[610] Department Codes
[614] Department Codes of ISDN Port
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
3-43 Features
3 Features
D
D
ial Tone, Distinctive
Description Four types of dial tone patterns are available to give some information about features enabled on the telephone set.
Dial tone 1: Normal dial tone. None of the features listed below
1 s are enabled.
Dial tone 2: Sounds when any one of the features below are set.
Absent Message Capability
Background Music (BGM) (for proprietary telephones only)
Call Forwarding
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Electronic Station Lockout
Executive Busy Override Deny
Pickup Dialing
Timed Reminder
1 s
Dial tone 3: Sounds when performing Account Code Entry.
1 s
Dial tone 4: Sounds when messages are waiting for the proprietary telephone extension.
1 s
Conditions None
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
Features 3-44
D
3 Features
D
irect Dialing In (DDI)
Description Allows the external caller to connect to the calling party in the system directly. Assignable destinations are: (1)Operator;
(2)extension; (3)Uniform Calling Distribution (UCD); (4)TAFAS;
(5) external ringer; (6) modem*.
This feature is one of the ISDN services.
Conditions • If an improper number is entered, the call will be transferred to the operator.
• It is possible to reject to answer the direct dialing in call on Class of
Service basis.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[111] DDI Removed Digit/Added Number Assignment
[112] DDI Number for Operator Assignment
[420] Direct Dialing In
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (33), (34)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
Operation References Not Applicable.
D
irect In Lines (DIL)
Description Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to one or more answering points.
DIL 1:1 puts an incoming outside call to a single destination.
Assignable destinations are: (1) extension; (2) modem*;
(3) external pager; (4) external ringer. This CO line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls but can be used by only one extension to receive calls.
DIL 1:N puts an incoming outside call to multiple destinations.
Assignable destinations are extensions only. This CO line can be used by multiple extension users to make and receive calls.
Both DIL 1:1 and 1:N can have different destinations for day and night modes (Night Service).
Conditions • If a CO line is programmed for both DIL 1:1 and DIL 1:N, it is regarded as a DIL 1:1 line.
3-45 Features * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3 Features
D
• DIL 1:1 to the modem* allows the caller to perform remote administration. DIL 1:1 to an external pager or ringer sounds the pager or ringer when receiving incoming calls (TAFAS feature).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
D
isplay, Call Information
Description The display proprietary telephone shows the user the following call information:
Extension number and name
These are shown when calling or when called by an extension user and during an established intercom call.
A display example: 123: John Lay
Dialed telephone number
This is shown when dialing the telephone number.
A display example: 91234567890
CO Line number
This is shown when receiving an outside call.
A display example: CO 03
Number or name of the caller
These are shown before answering if the Caller ID feature is available.
A display examples : 0412599090
: Panasonic
CO Line Name
This is shown when CO Line is received a call.
A display example: CO 03: Panasonic
Charge Meter
This is shown during an established outside call.
A display example: CO 02: 00005
Charge Fee
This is shown during an established outside call.
A display example: CO 01: 00001.15 FR
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features 3-46
D
3 Features
Duration Time
This is shown during an established incoming outside call.
A display example: CO 01 0: 02' 05
Conditions • Extension numbers and names are programmable. If no extension name is stored, only the extension number is displayed.
• It is programmable to select the first display, Charge Meter or Charge
Fee by System Programming. To alternate another display, press the
CO button.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by [125]
Assignment of Denomination.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[117] Charge Display Selection
[125] Assignment of Denomination
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time
[412] CO Line Name Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual
Charge Fee Reference – New Rate Set
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Caller ID
CO Line Name Display
Charge Fee Reference
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Display Call Information
D
isplay, Self-Extension Number
Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to display their own jack number and extension number in Station Programming mode.
Conditions Display example
If the jack number is 02 and the extension number is 102:
Jack02<=>EXT102
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Self-Extension Number Confirmation
Feature References None
3-47 Features
3 Features
Operation References Not applicable.
D
D
isplay, Time and Date
Description Offers the display proprietary telephone user a display of either the present time and the date or the date and the day of the week. It is displayed while on-hook.
Conditions • There are two types of display:
Display example 1: Day, Month, Time
1 Jan 13:00
Display example 2: Day, Month, Year, Day of the Week
1 Jan 1994 SAT
• The present date and time are set by System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[000] Date and Time Set
Feature References None
Operation References Appendix
—User Manual Display Examples
D
isplay Contrast Adjustment
Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display contrast.
Conditions Soft buttons and Volume button are used to sharpen the contrast to one of three levels.
Programming References
Configuration....................................................................User Manual,
Display Contrast Adjustment (KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
Features 3-48
D
3 Features
D
o Not Disturb (DND)
Description Allows an extension user to appear busy to an incoming extension call or allows to transfer an incoming outside call to the assigned extension. This can be set or cancelled by the extension user.
Conditions • If your proprietary telephone (PT) is not supplied with the FWD/DND button, it can be assigned on a flexible button.
• DND does not work for the following calls: doorphone calls; recalls for hold / Timed Reminder alarm.
• A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing the button showing the arrival of the call.
• An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their Class of Service (Do Not Disturb
Override).
• The following extension cannot set DND: operator, the Call Forwarding
(C.FWD) destination or the DND destination.
• When the extension has set the C.FWD, DND or DND for Direct
Dialing In Call, the extension cannot be a DND destination.
• Setting this feature cancels C.FWD or DND for Direct Dialing In Call.
• If the destination extension has DND activated, then the DSS button corresponding to it will light up red. This indicates to the proprietary telephone or DSS console user that the destination extension is unavailable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb for Direct
Dialing In Call
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Do Not Disturb (DND)
3-49 Features
3 Features
D
D
o Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
Description Allows the pre-assigned extension user to reject to answer the direct dialing in call on Class of Service basis. The rejected call will be transferred to an operator. The operator cannot reject the direct dialing in call. This feature is one of the ISDN services.
Conditions • Setting this feature cancels Call Forwarding or DND.
• If the destination extension has DND activated, then the DSS button corresponding to it will light up red. This indicates to the proprietary telephone or DSS console user that the destination extension is unavailable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Do not disturb for DDI
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Direct Dialing In (DDI)
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Do Not Disturb For Direct Dialing In Call
D
o Not Disturb (DND) Override
Description Permits the pre-assigned extension user to call another user who sets the Do Not Disturb feature. In this case the caller can override the DND programmed on the called extension’s telephone and causes the telephone to ring.
Conditions Class of Service (COS) programming determines the extension users who can perform DND Override.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Features 3-50
D
3 Features
D
oor Opener
Description Allows the extension users to unlock the door for a visitor from their telephones. The door can be unlocked by the extension users on pre-assigned Class of Service. However, while engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can open the door from the telephone to let the visitor in.
Conditions
• It is needed to install a user-supplied door opener on each door to be opened. Two door openers can be installed on each system. System
Connection* provides for four door openers.
• When a visitor presses the Call button on the doorphone, the system may automatically open the door, if the doorphone has a built-in door opener. It is required to set by the System Programming.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.7. Door Opener Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Door opener
[122] Automatic Door Open Assignment
[511] Door Open Access
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Doorphone Call
Operation References
PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Doorphone Call
D
oorphone Call
Description Your system supports a doorphone. If a visitor presses the doorphone button, pre-assigned extensions are rung. The extension who answers the call can talk to the visitor. It is possible for any extension user to originate a call to a doorphone.
Conditions • It is needed to install a user-supplied Doorphone.
• One doorphone can be installed on each system. System Connection* provides for two doorphones.
• It is necessary to program the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone during day and night mode.
3-51 Features * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3 Features
D
• If no extension user answers an incoming doorphone call within 30 seconds, the call stops ringing and is cancelled.
• While engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can open the door from the telephone to let the visitor in (Door Opener). This requires a user-supplied door opener.
• If the doorphone call is placed on hold, the Music on Hold is not available.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation
2.3.7 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Doorphone call
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Door Opener
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Doorphone Call
D
SS Console (KX-T7240)
Description The Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console provides direct access to stations and busy lamp display as well as providing 16 PF
(Programmable Feature) buttons.
The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary telephone (PT). System Programming assigns the jack numbers of the DSS Console and its associated PT.
Up to four consoles can be installed for KX-TD816. Up to eight consoles can be installed per system for KX-TD1232. The paired telephone user can carry out the following operations using the
DSS Console:
• Direct access to an extension (Direct Station Selection)
• Quick access to an outside party (One-Touch Dialing)
• Easy transfer of an outside call to an extension
(The programmable One-Touch Transfer feature provides simplified operation.)
• Quick access to a system feature
The above functions are enabled simply by pressing buttons on the console which were pre-programmed as function buttons.
A DSS Console has two types of buttons as shown on the following page:
Features 3-52
D
3-53 Features
3
DSS Console KX-T7240
DIGITAL
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
F3
F4
F1
F2
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
Features
DSS buttons PF buttons
DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons: Used to access extensions. Every button is programmed to correspond to an extension. Pressing a button allows the user to call the corresponding extension. Every button is provided with an indicator (Busy Lamp Field), which shows the current state of the corresponding extension as shown in the Table below:
To meet the user’s various needs, DSS buttons can be changed to the other function buttons.
Light
Off
On
State of extension
Idle
Busy / DND
Busy Lamp Field Table
PF (Programmable Feature) buttons printed as F1 through
F16: These buttons are provided with no default setting. The paired telephone user can program the buttons for the other function buttons.
3 Features
DE
Conditions • Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired telephone using Station Programming or Programming with
Personal Computer. System Programming with Proprietary Telephone is not available.
• If the extension number assigned to a DSS button is changed to another number, the DSS button automatically follows the new number. (Reprogramming is not necessary.)
• During System Connection*, DSS Consoles must be paired with telephones in the same system.
• If a port connected to a DSS Console is programmed for XDP jack, an
SLT can be connected to the port in parallel.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.2 Extension Connection
2.4.5 Extension Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[007] DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
[600] Extra Device Port
Station Programming ......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Extra Device Port (XDP) One-Touch Transfer by DSS
Button
Operation References DSS Console Features
—User Manual
E
lectronic Station Lockout
Description Allows the extension users to lock their stations so that other users cannot make outgoing outside calls. Any 3-digit numeric code can be used to lock the station. The same code is used to unlock it.
Conditions • Making intercom calls and receiving intercom or outside calls are permitted on the locked station.
• The new setting overrides the old one. If Operator sets Remote Station
Lock on a station that has already been locked by the station user, the user cannot unlock it.
• It is programmable to admit the press of the Terminate button during a outside call on the locked station.
Features 3-54 * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
E
3
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Electronic station lockout
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Remote Station Lock Control
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Electronic Station Lockout
Features
E
mergency Call
Description Allows the extension user to dial out a pre-assigned emergency number without seizing the CO line.
Conditions • Emergency numbers are allowed to call even in the following cases;
• in Account Code – Verified mode
• in any toll restriction levels
• after the pre-assigned charge limit is reached
• in Electronic Station Lockout
• A maximum of eight emergency numbers are assignable.
Any number can be stored as an emergency number.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[009] Emergency Dial Number Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, Emergency call 1 through 8
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Emergency Call
E
nd-to-End DTMF Signaling (Tone Through)
Description DTMF signaling is required for access to special network services offered by some telephone companies. This system allows the proprietary telephone user to send DTMF signals to the line during an established call.
Conditions None
3-55 Features
3 Features
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
E
E
xecutive Busy Override – CO Line
Description Allows a proprietary telephone user to barge into an existing outside call either between two outside parties on the ISDN line through the system or between an outside and an inside parties, so as to establish a three-party conference call. It is possible for extension users to prevent this function from being executed by another extension user (Executive Busy Override Deny).
Conditions • Class of Service programming determines the extension users who can perform Executive Busy Override.
• The pre-assigned extension users can barge in any CO line even if access to the line is not allowed by System Programming.
• This feature does not work if the extension has set Executive Busy
Override Deny or Data Line Security.
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties. This tone can be eliminated by System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Executive busy override deny set / cancel
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Conference
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Executive Busy Override — CO Line
Features 3-56
E
3 Features
E
xecutive Busy Override – Extension
Description Allows the pre-assigned extension user to barge into an existing extension call, either between two inside parties or between an outside and an inside parties, so as to establish a three-party conference call. It is possible for extension users to prevent this function from being executed by another extension user (Executive
Busy Override Deny).
Conditions • Class of Service programming determines the extension users who can perform Executive Busy Override and Executive Busy Override Deny.
• This feature does not work if the extension has set Executive Busy
Override Deny or Data Line Security.
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties. This tone can be eliminated by System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Executive busy override deny
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Conference
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Executive Busy Override — Extension
E
xtension Connection Assignment
Description
Conditions
Assign whether the extension user can perform all accesses or not.
• The extension of the jack number 01 should be set to “connect.”
• If the destination of DIL 1:1 or DDI is set to “disconnect,” the call is transferred to an operator.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[611] Extension Connection Assignment
Feature References None
3-57 Features
3 Features
Operation Reference Not applicable.
E
E
xtension Group
Description The system supports eight extension groups. Any member of an extension group can pick up a call directed to another group member (Group Call Pickup). In addition, there are Paging –
Group, Station Hunting and Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) features.
Conditions • Every extension should belong to an extension group but cannot belong to more than one group.
• If System Connection* is employed, an extension group can include extensions on both systems.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[602] Extension Group Assignment
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Pickup, Group
Paging – Group
Station Hunting
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Operation References Not applicable.
E
xternal Relay
Description A pre-assigned extension can switch on the relay connected to the system.
Conditions • Class of Service Programming determines the extension users who can access the relay.
• One external relay can be connected per system.
• It is possible to assign the connecting time by System Programming.
.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.8 External Relay, External Ringer and External Sensor Connection
Features 3-58 * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
E
3
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, External relay on
[213] External Relay Connecting Time
[512] External Relay Access
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual External Relay Access
Features
E
xternal Ringer
Description If a call is placed on a specified extension or a CO line, an external bell connected to the system will ring together. Any extension can answer the call by entering a feature number. The external ringer can be assigned as a destination of the following feature: a) CO Line – DIL, Direct Dialing In b) Extension – All incoming call c) TAFAS
Conditions • It is assignable to enable / disable the external ringer per extension / CO line.
• One ringer can be connected per system.
• The ringer can be assigned a floating number.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.8 External Relay, External Ringer and External Sensor Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, External ringer, External ringer answer
[418] External Ringer Assignment
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual External Ringer
3-59 Features
3 Features
E
xternal Sensor
Description If a device connected to the external sensor becomes active, it is informed to Operator 1 with the ring tone.
Display Sample: External Sensor 1
Ring Tone
←
5 sec
→
While having a conversation,
E
←
1 sec
→
Conditions • One external sensor can be connected per system.
• If a call is not answered within 60 seconds, it will automatically stop ringing.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.8 External Relay, External Ringer and External Sensor Connection
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References Operator Service Features,
—User Manual External Sensor
E
Xtra Device Port (XDP)
Description EXtra Device Port (XDP) expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension jack to contain two telephones. A proprietary telephone (PT) and a single line telephone (SLT) or DSS console and SLT can be connected to the same jack but have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions.
Features 3-60
E
3 Features
Conditions • XDP requires previous programming of the individual jack. Enable
XDP mode for the desired jack by System Programming. Immediately after changing the assignment, changed setting may not work for a maximum of eight seconds.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.5 EXtra Device Port (XDP) Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[600] EXtra Device Port
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Paralleled Telephone
Operation References Not applicable.
F
lexible Numbering
Description The numbers used for the access codes of system features and the number used for extension numbers are not fixed. They can be set as required provided there are not any conflicts. Feature numbers can be from one to three digits, utilizing numbers “0 through 9” as well as “ ” and “#.” Extension numbers can be two to four digits in length. Any number can be set as the leading first or second digit. If one digit is assigned as the leading digit, some extensions have 2-digit numbers and some have 3-digit numbers. If two digits are assigned as the leading digits, some have 3-digit numbers and some have 4-digit numbers.
3-61 Features
3 Features
Flexible Feature Numbers
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
45
46
47
48
49
40
41
42
43
44
35
36
37
38
39
30
31
32
33
34
25
26
27
28
29
Number
01
02
03 - 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Feature
1st hundred extension block
2nd hundred extension block
3rd through 16th hundred extension block
Operator call
Automatic line access
CO line group line access
System speed dialing
Station speed dialing
Station speed dialing programming
Doorphone call
Paging – external
Paging – external answer / TAFAS answer
Paging – group
Paging – group answer
Call pickup, CO line
Call pickup, group
Call pickup, directed
Call hold
Hold retrieve – intercom
Hold retrieve – CO line
Last number redial
Call park / call park retrieve
Account code entry
Door opener reserved
Station feature clear
Message waiting
External relay on
Call forwarding / do not disturb
Call pickup deny
External ringing
Call waiting
Executive busy override deny
Pickup dialing program
Absent message
Timed reminder
Electronic station lockout
Night service mode
Parallel telephone mode
Background music – external
Paging – deny
Primary COS select
Secondary COS select
F
733
74
750
76
77
790
70
67
710
720
730
731
78
69
65
721
791
793
63
4
43
40
41
6
60
68
64
44
50
51
53
#
52
49
55
Default
2
3
None
9
0
8
Features 3-62
F
3
Flexible Feature Numbers Number
57
58
59
60
61
62
63-68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
Feature
UCD log–in / log–out
Operator 1 call
Operator 2 call
Automatic callback busy cancel
Emergency call 1
Emergency call 2
Emergency call 3 through 8
External ringer answer
Timed reminder, remote
Call log, incoming
Do not disturb for DDI
CLIR
COLR
Call log lock control, incoming
Live Call Screening Password
System working report printout / clear
Features
Default
45
61
62
46
110
112
None
7
47
54
56
57
58
59
799
794
Fixed Feature Numbers
Default feature numbers are shown above.
In addition to the flexible feature numbers above, fixed feature numbers are provided.
Feature
While busy tone is heard
Automatic Callback Busy
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
Executive Busy Override
Message Waiting
While Do Not Disturb tone is heard
Do Not Disturb Override
While calling or talking
Account Code Delimiter
Alternate Calling – Ring / Voice
Conference
Door Open
Pulse to Tone Conversion
When the set is on-hook
Day / night mode display
Time display / date display switching
Default
3
4
6
2
2
# / 99
3
5
#
#
3-63 Features
3 Features
F
Conditions • Flexible feature numbers can only be dialed during dial tone.
• The following are examples of feature number conflicts:
Examples: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and 321, etc.
• Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for
“Call Waiting” must be followed by “1” and to cancel it, the same feature number should be followed by “0.”
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[100] Flexible Numbering
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
Features 3-64
F
3 Features
F
loating Station
Description You can assign virtual extension numbers for resources to make them appear to be extensions. These numbers are defined as floating numbers (FN). The following resources can have floating numbers:
(1) External paging instruments: used for TAFAS feature.
Two FNs are available for KX-TD816.
Four FNs are available for KX-TD1232.
These FNs can be assigned as: a) DIL 1:1 destination b) Intercept Routing destination
(2) External ringer: used for call reception.
One FN is available for KX-TD816.
Two FNs are available for KX-TD1232.
These FNs can be assigned as: a) DIL 1:1 destination b) Intercept Routing destination
(3) Modem*: used for system administration. One FN is available.
This can be assigned as DIL 1:1 destination and also can be used as an extension number to call the modem.
(4) UCD group: used for UCD feature. Eight FNs are available. These FNs can be assigned as : a) DIL 1:1 destination b) Extension c) Intercept Routing destination
(5) Digital Test Access: used for testing
One DTA is available.
The FN can be used as an extension.
Conditions Floating numbers cannot be used for setting a feature such as Call
Forwarding, etc.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.8 External Relay, External Ringer and External Sensor Connection
2.3.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
2.4.7 Remote Card Installation*
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
[813] Floating Number Assignment
3-65 Features * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3 Features
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
FH
F
ull One-Touch Dialing
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to make a call or have access to a system service with one button. There is no need to be offhook before pressing the button, which is required for One-Touch
Dialing. Handsfree operation is automatically provided by pressing a One-Touch Dialing button, a DSS button, a REDIAL button or a
SAVE button.
Conditions • It is necessary to program automatic handsfree dial mode.
• This feature is also available with DSS buttons on a DSS Console.
• This feature is also available with the large display operation of KX-
T7235 (Special Features for KX-T7235).
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Full One-Touch Dialing
H
andset / Headset Selection
Description The system supports the use of a user-supplied headset on a proprietary telephone(PT).
Conditions To set headset mode on a PT, use Station Programming.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Handset / Headset Selection
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
Features 3-66
H
3 Features
H
andsfree Answerback
Description Allows the speakerphone telephone user to talk to a caller without lifting the handset, if the user has set handsfree answerback mode.
If the user receives an intercom call in the mode, handsfree conversation is established immediately after the user hears beep tone and the caller hears confirmation tone.
Conditions • Handsfree answerback mode is set or cancelled by pressing the AUTO
ANSWER button.
• This feature does not work for calls from outside parties or doorphone calls.
• Handsfree Answerback set on a telephone overrides the Ring / Voice
Intercom Alerting mode preset on the telephone; Handsfree conversation mode is established as soon as confirmation tone is sent.
Programming Reference
No programming required.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Alternate Calling – Ring / Voice
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual
Handsfree Answerback
H
andsfree Operation
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to dial and to talk to the other party without lifting the handset. Pressing an appropriate button provides handsfree mode.
Conditions • This function can be utilized by pressing a button listed below when the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button indicator is off:
SP-PHONE button; MONITOR button; INTERCOM button;
CO button
• A single press of a One-Touch Button, DSS button, REDIAL button or a SAVE button also provides handsfree mode if Full One-Touch
Dialing is enabled.
• The KX-T7250 can be used for handsfree dialing operations, etc., but cannot be used for handsfree conversation.
Programming References
No programming required.
3-67 Features
3 Features
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Full One-Touch Dialing
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Handsfree Operation
H
old Recall
Description
Conditions
H
Prevents a call on hold from being kept waiting longer than a predetermined time. If the timer expires, ringing or an alarm tone is generated as a reminder to the user who held the call. If the user is on-hook and its speaker-phone is off, the phone is rung. If the user is off-hook or in speakerphone mode when the timer expires an alarm tone is sent from the built-in speaker of a proprietary telephone (PT) or from the handset receiver of a single line telephone at 15-second intervals.
• It is required to enable the Call Waiting Tone beforehand.
• Hold Recall can be disabled by System Programming.
• The display PT flashes the indication of the held party for five seconds at 15-second intervals synchronized with the tone.
• Alarm tone is sent as follows:
15 s
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Hold – CO Line
Call Hold – Intercom
Call Waiting
Operation References Not applicable.
Call Hold, Exclusive – CO line
Call Hold, Exclusive –Intercom
H
ost PBX Access
Description The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting a line from the host to a CO line in the
Digital Super Hybrid System.
Features 3-68
H
3 Features
Conditions • To enable Host PBX Access, put the host PBX line in a CO line group.
The user accesses the host PBX by selecting that CO line.
• A Host PBX Access Code is required to access CO lines of the host
PBX.
• A pause, if programmed, can be inserted between the user-dialed Host
PBX Access Code and the following digits (Automatic Pause Insertion).
Program the pause time required by the Host PBX for that CO line group.
• Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible (External
Feature Access).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[411] Host PBX Access Codes
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
H
OTEL APPLICATION
Description Allows the operator to handle the front/operator services such as check-in / check-out, timed reminder (wake-up call) and room management. This operation is applicable to only the operator extension with the KX-T7235.
C
heck-In / Check-Out
Description Allows the operator to operate the check-in / check-out service.
This feature can control the usage of an outside call by switching the Class of Service between primary and secondary, and count and print out the telephone charge and the other charges such as minibar.
Conditions • It is required to enable the hotel application by System Programming.
• When the check-in is assigned, the Class of Service is set to the primary one and the charge counter will be cleared. When the check-out is assigned, the Class of Service is set to secondary one and the total telephone charge and the other charge will be displayed and printed out.
• The telephone charge can be added the surcharge according to the preassigned margin rate. The pre-assigned tax rate can be also added.
3-69 Features
3 Features
H
• If the operator uses the paired DSS console, the operator can refer the check-in status on DSS console.
• It is possible to give a header to the printed bill such as hotel's name or greeting or to assign the starting location of output data with a personal computer.
• It is possible to limit the telephone usage on a pre-assigned amount by
System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[010] Budget Management
[011] Charge Margin and Tax Rate
[123] Hotel Application
[990] System Additional Information, Field (40)
Feature References
Section 4, Features,
Budget Management Charge Fee Reference
Operation References
Operator Service Features,
—User Manual Hotel Application
R
oom Management
Description Allows the extension user to print out the information of a guest room (e.g. cleaning status of the room and the total of the minibar charge) with a telephone in each room. The absent messages No.6-
No.9 can be printed out.
Conditions None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[008] Absent Messages
[990] System Additional Information, Field (41)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Absent Message Capability
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Hotel Application
Features 3-70
I
3 Features
T
imed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)
Description Allows the operator to set, cancel and confirm the wake-up call remotely for the extension.
Conditions • When either an operator or the extension sets a new time, the pre-set time is cleared.
• When a wake-up call is not answered, the operator's Alert indicator
(KX-T7235 only) will flash.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed reminder, remote
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Alert Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Timed Reminder
Operation References Operator Service Features,
—User Manual Hotel Application
I
ntercept Routing
Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls. There are two types of Intercept Routing. In the first case a call cannot be placed on the called party. This is called Rerouting. In the second case the call is not answered within a programmed time period. This is called Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA).
Conditions • Intercept Routing applies to DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N, TAFAS, Call
Forwarding, and Station Hunting.
• The final destination of intercepted calls must be programmed for day and for night modes. There are four possible destinations:
1) an extension
2) an external pager
3) UCD group
4) an external ringer
• If the destination is in Do Not Disturb, the call is redirected to operator.
3-71 Features
3 Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[203] Intercept Time
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
I
I
ntercom Calling
Description Allows the extension user to call another extension user within the system.
Conditions • Extension numbers are assigned to all extensions by System
Programming. An extension number is programmed to be two, three, or four digits. The ISDN extension number is programmed to be one, two or three digits.
• Names can be given to extension numbers by System Programming.
An extension number and a name, if programmed, is shown on the display PT during an intercom call.
• DSS buttons permit one-touch access to an extension and provide Busy
Lamp Field.
• KX-T7235 user can make an extension call with an extension dialing directory on the display.
• After dialing an extension number, the user will hear one of the following:
Ringback tone: indicates that the other extension is being called.
Confirmation tone: indicates that the user can perform Voice
Calling.
Busy tone: indicates that the other extension is busy.
Do Not Disturb tone: indicates that the other extension has
DND assigned.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – DSS Button
Features 3-72
I
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Button, Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Intercom Calling
3 Features
I
SDN Extension
Description The system supports terminal equipments with separate power supplies. For example, ISDN telephone, G4 Facsimile and personal computers which are connected to optional ISDN S0 Line
Unit or Card: KX-TD280, KX-TD281 or KX-TD282. A maximum of eight terminal equipments can be connected to each ISDN S0 bus with point-to-multi-point configuration. Terminal equipments can be addressed individually with Multiple Subscriber Numbers
(MSN). The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit, 0 through 9. If MSN is not assigned, all equipments on the same S0 bus are called simultaneously.
The following bearer capabilities can be supported:
Transfer Mode Transfer Capability
Circuit Unrestricted digital
Speech
3.1 kHz Audio
The functions of terminal equipment are similar to single line telephone functions except for the following features:
• Automatic Callback Busy • Conference
• Call Forwarding
• Call Hold
• Call Park
• Call Pickup
• Call Transfer
• Call Waiting
• Do Not Disturb
• Log-In / Log-Out
• Message Waiting
• Paging – Group Answer
• Pickup Dialing
• Timed Reminder
Conditions • Class of Service and department code for ISDN port apply to all terminal equipments on the same S0 bus.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation
2.4.2 ISDN S0 Line Connection
3-73 Features
3 Features
L
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port
[422] ISDN Port Type
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[424] ISDN Configuration
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode
[426] ISDN TEI Mode
[427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number
[428] ISDN Extension Progress Tone
[613] ISDN Class of Service
[614] Department Codes of ISDN Port
[615-616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment – Day/Night for
ISDN Extension
• The possible parameter combinations are listed below. The underlined selections are recommended. The selections marked "*" are activated, regardless of the assignments.
[426] ISDN
TEI Mode Program
[422] ISDN
Port Type
[423] ISDN
Layer 1 Active
Mode
[424] ISDN
Configuration
[425] ISDN
Data Link
Mode
Permanent Point Permanent
CO
Parameter
Extension
—
Call/
Permanent
Call/
Permanent
Multipoint
Point
Multipoint
—
Call/
Parmanent
Call *
Fix/
Automatic
—
Fix *
Automatic *
Feature References None
Operation References
—User Manual ISDN Telephone Features
L
ED Indication, CO Line
Description The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the buttons associated with CO lines tell the line conditions with a variety of lighting patterns. This allows the user to determine which lines are idle and which lines are in use. The table below shows the lighting patterns and line conditions according to the CO button type.
Features 3-74
L
3 Features
Flashing light (winks) patterns
LED Indicator
Off
Green On
Green slow flash
Green moderate flash
Green rapid flash
Red On
Red slow flash
CO Line Status
Idle
I-use
I-hold
I-Exclusive Hold / Outside-to-outside call
/ Unattended Conference
Hold Recall / Incoming call
Other-use
Other-hold
Slow flash
Moderate flash
Rapid flash
1 s
Conditions Red slow flash indication appears on the S-CO button only.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Operation References Not applicable.
Button, Single-CO (S-CO)
3-75 Features
3 Features
L
L
ED Indication, Intercom
Description The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicator of the INTERCOM button indicates the line condition with a variety of lighting patterns. This allows the user to see the current state of the intercom line. The table below shows the lighting patterns and the intercom line conditions.
INTERCOM Button
Off
Green On
Green slow flash
Green moderate flash
Green rapid flash
Conditions None
Programming References
No programming required.
Intercom Status
Idle
Intercom call / Conference established
Intercom call hold
Intercom call exclusive hold /
Consultation hold
Incoming intercom / Doorphone call
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Busy Lamp Field
Operation References Not applicable.
L
ine Access, Automatic
Description Allows the extension user to dial the automatic line access number and access an idle line from the CO line groups assigned for the extension. The proprietary telephone user can use the Loop-CO button in place of the access number.
Conditions • Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines available to access.
• An idle CO line is selected from the CO line groups assigned to the station. If one CO line group is available, an idle line is selected from that group. If multiple CO line groups are available, the CO line group hunting sequence is determined by System Programming.
• This feature requires a CO button (G-CO, L-CO or S-CO) assignment on a proprietary telephone (PT). Dialing the line access code selects a
CO button on a PT according to the priority:
S-CO > G-CO > L-CO on a hunted CO line group
Features 3-76
L
3 Features
• If Idle Line Preference – Outgoing is set on the telephone, the user can access an idle line only by going off-hook.
• The system waits for a programmed time before dialing after a CO line is seized.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic line access
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Feature References Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Outward Dialing – Line Access, Automatic
L
ine Access, CO Line Group
Description Allows the extension user to dial access a CO line group. An idle line is selected from the CO line group. To specify a CO line group, dial the feature number (the default setting is “8”) and a desired CO line group number (1 through 8). A proprietary telephone user can also specify a CO line group by pressing a
Group-CO button.
Conditions • Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines available to access.
• An idle line is selected in sequence from the lines in the specified CO line group.
• Group-CO buttons must be programmed prior to use.
• If Idle Line Preference – Outgoing is set on the telephone, the user can access an idle line only by going off-hook.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, CO line group line access
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button
3-77 Features
3 Features
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)
CO Line Connection
Assignment – Outgoing
CO Line Group
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Outward Dialing – Line Access, CO Line Group
L
L
ine Access, Direct
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to select a CO line by pressing an idle CO button, which automatically establishes handsfree operation mode and allows the user to perform On-Hook
Dialing. The user need not press the SP-PHONE button,
MONITOR button nor lift the handset.
Conditions • There are three types of CO buttons which can be programmed on an extension: Single-CO button, Group-CO button, and Loop-CO button.
• Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines available to access.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Loop-CO (L-
CO) Button, Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Button, Single-CO (S-CO)
CO Line Connection Assignment
– Outgoing
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Outward Dialing – Line Access, Automatic, Line Access, CO Line
Group, Line Access, Individual
Features 3-78
L
3 Features
L
ine Access, Individual
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user one-button access to a CO line without having to dial a line access code.
Conditions • Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines available to access.
• This feature requires a Single-CO (S-CO) button assignment on a proprietary telephone.
• The system waits for a programmed time before dialing after a CO line is seized.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Button, Single-CO (S-CO) CO Line Connection
Assignment – Outgoing
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Outward Dialing – Line Access, Individual
L
ine Preference – Incoming (No Line / Prime Line / Ringing Line)
Description A proprietary telephone user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences:
(1) No Line Preference
No line is selected when you go off-hook. You must select a line to answer.
(2) Prime Line Preference
You can assign a prime line beforehand and answer a call on that line, when multiple calls are received simultaneously.
(3) Ringing Line Preference
When you go off-hook, you answer the call ringing at your telephone.
3-79 Features
3 Features
L
Conditions • Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting.
• If Prime Line Preference is selected and an incoming call arrives from a line other than the prime line, it cannot be answered just by going offhook. The Prime Line should be assigned to the Single CO button.
• If Ringing Line Preference is selected, going off-hook does not answer a line programmed for “no ring” even though there is an incoming call.
Going off-hook during the delay time does not answer a line programmed for “delayed ringing.”
• A single line telephone is always set to Ringing Line Preference and cannot be changed.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming
Feature References None
Operation References Basic Operation,
—User Manual Receiving Calls
L
ine Preference – Outgoing (Idle Line / No Line / Prime Line)
Description A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following three line preferences:
(1) Idle Line Preference:
When you go off-hook, you are connected to an idle line.
An idle line is automatically selected from the pre-assigned lines.
(2) No Line Preference:
No line is selected when you go off-hook. You must select a line to make a call.
(3) Prime Line Preference:
When you go off-hook, you are connected to the preassigned line. Assign a line as your prime line beforehand.
Conditions • Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting.
• To set Prime Line Preference, one prime line is selected from intercom or CO lines.
• The CO lines used by users must be connected by programming.
• To select Idle Line Preference, CO lines available for the user should be programmed. Also CO lines available for Automatic Line Access should be assigned.
Features 3-80
L
3 Features
• The user can override the Idle / Prime Line Preference temporarily to select a specific line. To select it, press the desired line access button
(INTERCOM or CO button) before going off-hook or pressing the SP-
PHONE/MONITOR button; or if Full One-Touch Dialing is enabled, press One-Touch Dialing, DSS, REDIAL or SAVE button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual
Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Loop-CO (L-
CO) Button, Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Preferred Line Assignment – Outgoin
Feature References Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing
Operation References Basic Operation,
—User Manual Making Calls
L
ive Call Screening (LCS)
†
Description Allows a proprietary telephone user to monitor their voice mailbox while incoming callers are leaving a message and, if desired, intercept the call. The voice mailbox can be monitored in one of two ways — Hands-free or Private.
Hands-free Mode
The voice mailbox is monitored through the built-in speaker of the proprietary telephone.
Private Mode
The proprietary telephone sounds an alert tone when callers are connected to the voice mailbox. To monitor the call, the user goes off hook on the handset or speakerphone.
1s
3-81 Features
Alert Tone
To intercept the call in either Hands-Free or Private mode, press the
LCS button.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
3 Features
L
A single line telephone, which is connected with a proprietary telephone in parallel, can be also used to monitor a recording message. Be sure that the Live Call Screening on the connected proprietary telephone has been activated.
This feature is useful when you are out with a portable handset of a cordless telephone (SLT). The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is being recorded. To intercept the call, flash the hooking.
Conditions • When the extension user is having a conversation, a call waiting tone is sent. The user can put an existing call on hold before accessing LCS.
• A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Live Call Screening button.
• To prevent unauthorized monitoring, a three-digit password must be set by the LCS user. If the user forgets his password, it can be cleared by
Operator 1.
• Each extension can be programmed to either close the mailbox or keep
Programming References recording the conversation after the call is intercepted.
System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
Station Programming,
Live Call Screening Mode Selection
Flexible Button Assignment — Live Call Screening Button
Live Call Screening Cancel Button
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Live Call Screening (LCS)
L
ockout
Description If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, they are both disconnected from the speech path automatically. This feature applies to extension and outside calls. Reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party after it is disconnected.
Conditions None
Programming References
No programming required.
Features 3-82
LM
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Lockout
3 Features
L
og-In / Log-Out
Description Assigns an extension to join (log-in) or leave (log-out) a hunting group. Extensions in log-out status receive no calls by Station
Hunting but can receive other calls, unlike the DND feature.
Conditions • There should be at least one extension that is in log-in status. Only one log-in extension cannot be set in log-out status.
lighting pattern
Red on
Red flash off
Log-Out
UCD
CO Line Status
Station Hunting
Log-Out
Log-In (plural reception)
Log-In (no reception) Log-In (no reception)
The lighting patterns of Log-In/Log-Out button and the status are shown below.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, UCD log-in / log-out
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Log-In / Log-Out Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Station Hunting
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features
—User Manual Log-In / Log-Out
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
M
anager Extension
Description One extension in the system can be assigned as the system manager. This extension can perform System Programming.
Conditions • Besides the manager extension, the extension that is connected to the jack 1 is able to perform System Programming.
• If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the manager extension, the proprietary telephone user is regarded as the manager.
3-83 Features
3 Features
M
• Manager extension can print out and clear the system working report.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[100] Flexible Numbering, System working report printout / clear
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
M
essage Waiting
Description The system supports the ability to inform the called party of a message waiting. The user, with a MESSAGE button, knows there is a message if the LED of the MESSAGE button is lit red. Even if the button is not provided nor assigned, the called party hears special dial tone, when he / she goes off-hook. Pressing the lit
MESSAGE button also means to call back the extension that left the message or listen to the messages which are stored in the mailbox of the Voice Processing System.
Conditions • For the proprietary telephone which is provided with no MESSAGE button, a flexible CO button can be assigned as the MESSAGE button either by System or Station Programming.
• Canceling the message can be performed from the extension setting it or from the extension receiving it.
• The system supports a maximum of 128 simultaneous messages.
• Messages are always left on the original extension. It is not sent to a
Call Forwarding or Station Hunting destination.
• A single line telephone user will hear the ring tone as a notification, if he / she receives a message. It is programmable to set the interval of a ring tone by System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Message
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
[990] System Additional Information Fields (9), (38)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Dial Tone, Distinctive Voice Mail Integration
Features 3-84
M
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Message Waiting
3 Features
Voice Mail Integration
M
icrophone Mute
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone, for privacy reasons.
Conditions • This is effective for the microphone only; your voice will only be muted during a handsfree conversation.
• The user can hear the other party’s voice during Microphone Mute.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Microphone Mute
M
ixed Station Capacities
Description This system supports a wide range of telephone sets, not only
Proprietary Telephone (PT) in the Digital Super Hybrid System, but also single line rotary telephones (employing dial pulse signals) and single line push-button dialing telephones (touch tone). The super hybrid method used in this system allows any telephone to be connected to an extension modular jack without an adaptor.
Conditions • If a telephone is replaced by another one, the stored data (such as feature button storage) is held for the new one.
• It is possible to ignore the pulse dial by System Programming.
In this case, a single line rotary telephone does not function.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.2 Extension Connection
2.4.3 Extension Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[121] Pulse Dial Reception Assignment
3-85 Features
3 Features
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
M
M
odule Expansion
Description The KX-TD816 starts with 8 extension jacks.
The KX-TD1232 starts with 16 extension jacks. It can be expanded by installing optional card and units.
• Extension line unit: Adds 8 extension jacks.
• ISDN S0 line card : KX-TD816 – Adds 2 ISDN S0 lines.
KX-TD1232 – Adds 4 ISDN S0 lines.
• ISDN S0 line unit : Adds 2 ISDN S0 lines.
The KX-TD816 can have a maximum of one extension unit, one
ISDN S0 line card and one ISDN S0 unit.
The KX-TD1232 can have a maximum of two extension units, one
ISDN S0 line card and one ISDN S0 unit.
Conditions • The number of extension jacks may be different from the number of telephones if the eXtra Device Port feature is enabled. This feature allows one extension jack to have two telephones.
• When an optional card and / or unit is installed, the card and / or unit identification is set by System Programming.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.2 ISDN S0 Line Connection (Optional Card)
2.4.4 ISDN S0 Line Connection (Optional Unit)
2.4.5 Extension Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type
Feature References Section 3, Features,
EXtra Device Port (XDP) Paralleled Telephone
Operation References Not applicable.
Features 3-86
M
3 Features
M
ultilingual
Description Assigns the language displayed on proprietary telephones and printed out to SMDR.
Conditions • You can select from German, English or French when you are in the
Station Programming mode or when in normal use.
• You can select from German or English when you are in the System
Programming mode or when you print out the data to SMDR.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[101] Language Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Field (35)
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
M
usic on Hold
Description
Conditions
While a party is on hold, music is automatically sent.
• Operations such as Call Hold, or Exclusive Call Hold generates Music on Hold. In case of Call Transfer, it is possible to assign either Music or ringback tone is generated.
• The music source is used for Music on Hold and / or BGM. Select a music source for each usage.
• The system has an internal music source. However it may be necessary to connect a user-supplied external music source such as a radio to the system. Up to two music sources can be connected per system. It is required to select the internal or external music source by System
Programming.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.10 External Music Source Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[803] Music Source Use
[990] System Additional Information, Fields, (1) and (20)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Background Music (BGM)
3-87 Features
3 Features
N
Operation References Not applicable.
N
ight Service
Description This supports both Night and Day modes of operation. The system operation for originating and receiving calls can be different for day and night modes. The system operation for restricting toll calls can be arranged separately to prevent unauthorized toll calls at night.
Switching of the Day / Night Mode
Day / Night mode can be switched either automatically at a preassigned time or manually by pre-assigned extension or Operator at any time desired.
Class of Service programming determines the extensions that can perform it.
Automatic Night Service: If you set automatic switching mode, your system will switch the Day / Night mode at the programmed time each day. The starting time of the Day /
Night mode can be set for each day.
Manual Night Service: Operator and the pre-assigned extension can switch the Day / Night mode manually.
Conditions • The following programming items may be assigned in a different way between day mode and night mode:
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
— Day / Night
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
— Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
• After switching the service mode manually in Automatic mode the
Automatic mode will be changed to the Manual mode.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Night service mode
[102] Day / Night Service Starting Time
[513] Night Service Access
Features 3-88
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Night Service
Special Display Features,
Night Service
N
otebook Function
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to store the phone number in the memory during conversation on the phone or on-hook status.
The stored number is dialed automatically with simple operation.
Conditions • The outside line, which was connected when the user stored the number is selected when re-dialing the number. If the line is busy, the busy tone is sent.
• The pause, if programmed, can be inserted between the CO line access number and the following phone number (Automatic Pause Insertion).
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Notebook Function
O
ff-Hook Monitor
Description Allows the speaker-phone proprietary telephone user to let the other users listen to the conversation through the built-in speaker, when the existing call keep using the handset.
Conditions • This feature is not available for the KX-T7250.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Off-Hook Monitor
3-89 Features
3 Features
O
O
ne-Touch Dialing
Description One-Touch Dialing offers the proprietary telephone (PT) user onetouch access to a desired party or system feature. This is enabled by storing a telephone number or a feature number of up to 16digits on a One-Touch Dialing button. The number of buttons available depends on the type of PT. One-Touch Dialing buttons can be programmed to flexible buttons: CO, DSS or PF
(Programmable Feature).
Conditions • It is possible to store an account code into a One-Touch Dialing button.
• Speed Dialing, One-Touch Dialing, manual dialing, Last Number
Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used together.
• It is possible to store a number consisting of 17 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in two One-Touch Dialing buttons. In this case, a line access code should not be stored on the second button.
• If the Full One-Touch Dialing is enabled, there is no need to go offhook, before pressing the One-Touch Button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – One-Touch Dialing Button
Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
DSS Console Features ......................................................User Manual,
PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons – One-Touch Dialing
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Full One-Touch Dialing
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual One-Touch Dialing
DSS Console Features,
One-Touch Dialing
One-Touch Access for System Features
O
ne-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Description This feature, if programmed, allows the DSS Console and the proprietary telephone user to hold an outside call and quickly transfer it to an extension. While talking to an outside party, pressing a DSS button on the console or the proprietary telephone provides automatic hold and transfer. There is no need to press the
Features 3-90
O
3 Features
TRANSFER button. The extension starts ringing immediately.
Conditions • One-Touch Transfer cannot be performed when there is another call on
Consultation Hold.
• If One-Touch Transfer mode is disabled, the user transfers an outside call by pressing the TRANSFER button followed by the DSS button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Call Transfer — to Extension
DSS Console Features,
Call Transfer
O
perator
Description
Conditions
The system supports up to two operators during day and night modes separately. Any extension can be appointed as an operator.
The extension assigned as Operator has the ability to perform the following operations:
• Performing the Hotel Application
• Printing / clearing the System Working Report
• Setting / clearing the Remote Station Lock
• Switching the Class of Service – primary / secondary
• Switching the Day / Night mode manually
• Turning on / off the external background music
Only Operator 1 has the ability to perform the following operations:
• Setting the Automatic Overflow
• Setting / cancelling the Incoming Call Log Lock
• Setting the Hurry-Up Transfer
• Receiving the Alert Indication
• Receiving an alarm tone from the external sensor
• Receiving the call which is transferred from DND extension
• If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the operator’s extension, the proprietary telephone user is regarded as the operator.
• The operator can be assigned as a destination of the Transfer Recall by
System Programming.
3-91 Features
3 Features
O
• The Direct Dialing In call which is denied to receive by the extension or is dialed improper number is forwarded to the operator.
• The Alert Indication is only available for the operator 1 in Day mode.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[100] Flexible Numbering, Night service mode, Background music – external, Primary COS select, Secondary COS select, Timed reminder remote, Call log lock control, incoming, System working report printout / clear
[120] Operator Queue
[990] System Additional Information, Field (11)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Hurry-UP Button, Voice Mail (VM)
Transfer Button
Feature References None
Operation References Operator Service Features
—User Manual
O
perator Call
Description Allows the extension user to call an operator extension by dialing the feature number, if at least one operator is assigned. There can be one or two extensions assigned as Operator 1 and 2.
When an operator call (default: 9) is made, the call is connected to
Operator 1. If the Operator 1’s line is busy, the call is connected to
Operator 2.
Conditions None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[100] Flexible Numbering, Operator call, Operator 1 call, Operator 2 call
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Operator Call
Features 3-92
P
3 Features
P
AGING FEATURES – SUMMARY
Description Paging allows you to make a voice announcement to multiple persons at the same time. Your message is announced over the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones and / or external speakers (external pagers). The paged person can answer your page from a nearby telephone. Making and answering a page is possible from either a proprietary or single line telephone. You can do paging with a call on hold in order to transfer the call (Paging and
Transfer). It is also possible to deny the page.
Paging features are classified as follows:
Paging – All
Paging – External
Paging – Group
P
aging – All
Description Allows you to make a voice announcement from the speakers of the proprietary telephones and from the external paging devices
(external pagers). If one of the paged persons answers your paging, you can talk to the person through the connected line.
Conditions • If System Connection* is established, paging is performed to all proprietary telephones and all external paging devices in both systems.
• The confirmation tone is sent to extensions, when the paging is made or answered. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers, before the voice announcement. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• The ringing or busy extension cannot receive a page.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external, Paging – external answer /
TAFAS answer, Paging – group, Paging – group answer, Paging – deny
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References None
3-93 Features * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3 Features
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Paging — All
Paging — DENY
Paging — ANSWER
Paging and Transfer
P
P
aging – External
Description Allows you to make a voice announcement using external paging devices (external pagers). Up to two pagers can be contained per system. It is possible to select one or two pagers to perform your paging. Any telephone user can answer your Paging – External.
Conditions • Previous connection of an external pager is required.
• External pagers can be used for TAFAS, Paging – External , or
Background Music (BGM) – External in this order. For example, if
Paging – External is overridden by TAFAS, reorder tone is returned to the performer of the Paging – External. If BGM is overridden by another higher priority, it is interrupted and starts again when the higher priority is finished.
• The confirmation tone is sent to the extensions and external pager, when the paging is made or answered. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers before the voice announcement. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external, Paging – external answer /
TAFAS answer, Paging – deny
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Paging — All
Paging — DENY
Paging — ANSWER
Paging and Transfer
Features 3-94
P
3 Features
P
aging – Group
Description Allows you to select an extension group and make a voice announcement. All the proprietary telephones in the group will receive the page. If a member of the paged group answers your paging, you can talk to the person through the connected line.
Conditions • To select all groups pages all extensions.
• Confirmation tone is sent when the page is made or answered.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – group, Paging – group answer,
Paging - deny
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Extension Group
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Paging — Group
Paging — DENY
Paging — ANSWER
Paging and Transfer
P
aralleled Telephone
Description Proprietary telephone device can be connected in parallel with a single line telephone (SLT).
When a parallel connection is made, an extension user can make and answer a call using either telephone.
Conditions • The proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to perform normal operations whether or not the SLT is enabled.
• If one telephone goes off-hook while the other telephone is on a call, the call is switched to the former.
• When receiving a call;
The SLT is enabled; Both the PT and the SLT ring except when the PT is in Handsfree Answerback mode or Voice Alerting mode.
The SLT is disabled; PT rings but the SLT does not ring. However the
SLT can answer the phone.
• When the SLT is in operation, the display and LED indicator on the paired PT will show in the same way as if the PT is in operation.
• If eXtra Device Port feature is available, each telephone can act as completely different extension.
3-95 Features
3 Features
• Call Waiting tone can be heard only PT.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.4 Paralleled Telephone Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Parallel telephone mode
Feature References Section 3, Features,
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User manual Paralleled Telephone Connection
P
P
ickup Dialing
Description Allows an extension user to make an outgoing call by going offhook, if the user has previously stored the telephone number. This feature is also known as Hot Line.
Conditions • A rotary dial telephone without the “#” button cannot program this feature. For programming the phone number, replace a rotary dial telephone to the telephone with the “#” button temporarily.
• The user uses a feature number to enable or disable pickup dialing.
• If the feature is enabled and the user goes off-hook, dial tone is generated for the waiting time and then dialing starts. During the waiting time the user can dial another party, overriding the Pickup
Dialing function.
• If the user answers an incoming call or retrieves a call on hold, the
Pickup Dialing feature does not work.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Pickup dialing program set / cancel
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)
Features 3-96
P
3 Features
P
ower Failure Restart
Description Returning on electricity, the system restarts the stored data automatically. Before restarting, the system records the error logs if necessary.
Conditions • If System Connection* is established, the Slave system makes a copy of the restored data of the Master system.
• In the event of a power failure, system memory is protected by the factory-provided lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the memories of Camp-On and Call Park. However if the system finds the wrong system data, the indication “Memory data loss” is displayed on the display proprietary telephone of Operator 1.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
P
redial
Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to check and correct the dialed number in on-hook state before going off-hook. When going off-hook, making a call is initiated.
Conditions • This feature is available during stand-by state only.
• A line access number is always required to make an outgoing outside call.
• Making a call is performed at the time the handset is lifted up or the CO or SP-PHONE button is pressed.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Predial Preparation
3-97 Features * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3 Features
P
rivacy, Automatic
Description By default all conversations established on CO lines, extension lines, and doorphone lines have privacy enabled.
Conditions Automatic privacy may be temporarily released for a three-party conference, which is established by Executive Busy Override.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Executive Busy Override – CO
Line
Operation References Not applicable.
Executive Busy Override –
Extension
P
P
rivate Call
Description Allows the user to exclude private calls from the SMDR printout.
When making a private call, if the user enters the pre-set account code, the dialed number is not included in the SMDR printout.
Conditions • It is required to program the account code for private calls in program
[105] “Account Code.” The location 01 of the entries is used as the account code for this feature.
• To prevent private calls, clear the entry above.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[105] Account Codes
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Change Fee Reference – Charge Account Code Set
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Account Code Entry Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Account Code Entry
Features 3-98
R
3 Features
R
edial, Automatic
Description This is a special feature for the proprietary telephones, that provides automatic redialing of the last dialed, saved number or call log, if the called party is busy. If the Last Number Redial, Saved
Number Redial, Call Log operation or Notebook function is performed handsfree, the telephone set will hang up and try again after a pre-determined period of time.
Conditions • Redial Repeat Time and Interval Time can be changed by System
Programming.
• Pressing Terminate button allows the system to cancel this feature.
• If any dialing operation is done during Automatic Redial, this function is finished.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Notebook Function
Redial, Saved Number
Operation References
PT Features,
—User Manual Redial, Automatic
Redial, Last Number
Special Features for KX-T7235
– Call Log, Outgoing
3-99 Features
R
3 Features
R
edial, Last Number
Description Every telephone in the system automatically saves the last telephone number dialed to a CO line and allows the extension user to dial the same number again.
Conditions
• With a proprietary telephone, REDIAL button is used to carry out Last
Number Redial. With a single line telephone, the feature number is used.
• The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least one digit to be sent to a CO line is dialed. Dialing a CO line access code alone does not change the memorized number.
• Proprietary telephones allows multiple redialing automatically
(Automatic Redial).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Last number redial
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Redial, Automatic
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual
Redial, Last Number
R
edial, Saved Number
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to save a telephone number and redial the number afterwards. The user can store it while in conversation on a CO line. The saved number can be redialed many times until another one is stored.
Conditions
• Proprietary telephones (PT) allow automatic multiple redialing
(Automatic Redial).
• If the SAVE button is not provided on your PT, it is possible to assign a flexible button to be the SAVE button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – SAVE Button
3-100 Features
3 Features
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Redial, Automatic
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Redial, Saved Number
R
R
emote Station Lock Control
Description Operator is given the privilege of controlling Electronic Station
Lockout on any station.
Conditions The new setting is superior to the old one. If Station Lockout has already been set by the extension user and Remote Station Lock is set by
Operator, canceling the lock is only possible by Operator.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Electronic Station Lockout
Operation References Operator Service Features,
—User Manual Remote Station Lock Control
R
inging, Delayed
Description If Direct In Lines (DIL) 1:N is established, a telephone set is originally set to ring instantly. This setting can be changed to delayed ringing, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) on a CO line basis.
Conditions • This feature does not apply to DIL 1:1 calls.
• If delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) is assigned to an extension, the extension can answer an incoming call during no ring or the delay time by pressing the flashing button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Direct In Lines (DIL)
Features 3-101
R
Operation References Not applicable.
3 Features
R
inging, Discriminating
Description Allows the extension user to identify the incoming call by the ringing pattern. (See Section 5.1 “Tone / Ring Tone.”)
Conditions • When there are multiple incoming calls and the extension goes from off-hook to on-hook, the calls are rung according to the following priority:
<1> Consultation Hold Recall
<2> An incoming call from a line in which the Prime Line
Preference – Incoming function has been set (with a proprietary telephone only)
<3> Call Waiting
<4> Incoming calls; Hold Recall; Transfer Recall; Unattended
Conference Recall
• If multiple incoming calls arrive at an on-hook extension simultaneously, priority as to which calls should be rung is generally on a “first-come first-served” basis. In the case of proprietary telephones
(PT), however, when the Prime Line Preference – Incoming function has been set, this line takes precedence.
• Incoming TAFAS calls can be identified by ringing signals sent out from external pagers or ringer. The ringing pattern is the same as the outside calls.
• The PT user can select a desired tone frequency for each CO button.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Operation References Not applicable.
R
inging Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to select the desired ringer frequency for each CO button. This provides discrimination of incoming outside calls.
3-102 Features
3 Features
S
Conditions There are eight ringer frequencies available. One of them can be assigned to a CO button that is assigned as each of the following buttons: Single-
CO, Group-CO, or Loop-CO button. It is not possible to assign a ringer frequency to any other button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
S
ecret Dialing
Description Allows an extension user to conceal all or part of a registered telephone number that normally appears on the display during
System Speed Dialing or One-Touch Dialing. Numbers can be assigned to Programmable Feature buttons on PT and DSS
Console. When a display telephone user makes a call to the telephone number that is set to Secret Dialing, all or part of the number does not appear on the display. Additionally, KX-T7235 are capable of Secret Dialing for “Station Speed Dialing” numbers.
Conditions • When storing a number, press the INTERCOM button at the beginning and the end of the number to be concealed.
• You can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number.
• The concealed part will be printed out by SMDR.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[990] System Additional Information, Field (26)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – One-Touch Dialing Button
Feature References Section 3, Features,
One-Touch Dialing
System Speed Dialing
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Secret Dialing
Station Speed Dialing
Features 3-103
S
3 Features
S
pecial Features for KX-T7235
The KX-T7235 is provided with a large display that allows the user to originate calls or to access system facilities with ease. The display prompts the user with information related to the desired feature. Examples of this special function are shown below:
Call Log, Outgoing
Extension Dialing
Hotel Application (operator only) (
→
See the “HOTEL
APPLICATION.”)
Station Speed Dialing
System Feature Access Menu
System Speed Dialing
C
all Log, Outgoing
Description Provides a display of the last dialed telephone numbers and allows the user to perform redialing the number by pressing the associated button.
Conditions The oldest telephone number will be eliminated when over the limited numbers are dialed out.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235),
—User Manual Call Log, Outgoing
Extension Dialing
Description Provides a display of extension names and numbers. The user can call an extension by pressing the associated function button.
Conditions System Programming of extension numbers and names is required.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
3-104 Features
3 Features
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
Feature References
None
Operation References Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235),
—User Manual
Extension Dialing
S
Station Speed Dialing
Description A list of the names and telephone numbers stored for One-Touch
Dialing is displayed allowing the user to make a one-touch call by name without having to know the number.
Conditions • It is necessary to program One-Touch Dialing Numbers and Names into the 10 function buttons F1 through F10.
• It is programmable to select the first display, number or name.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[990] System Additional Information, Field (19)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Station Speed Dialing Number / Name Assignment (KX-T7235 only)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
One-Touch Dialing
Operation References Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235),
—User Manual Station Speed Dialing
System Feature Access Menu
Description This feature provides a display of the system features available at any time and allows the user to have access to the desired features.
Conditions • The features available to access are:
Absent Message Capability
Call Pickup, Group
Call Forwarding (set / cancel)
Do Not Disturb (set / cancel)
Message Waiting
Paging (access / answer)
Paralleled Telephone
Features 3-105
S
3 Features
• In addition to the features above, the operator can have the display of the following features:
Background Music (BGM) – External
Call Park
Class of Service (primary / secondary)
Night Service
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235),
—User Manual System Feature Access Menu
System Speed Dialing
Description A list of the names stored for System Speed Dialing is displayed.
This allows the user to dial by name without having to know the telephone number. All the user needs to do is pressing the button associated with the desired name.
Conditions • The numbers and names for System Speed Dialing must be programmed.
• If a name is not stored for a number, it is not displayed and cannot be called with this feature.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
Feature References Section 3, Features,
System Speed Dialing
Operation References Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235),
—User Manual System Speed Dialing
3-106 Features
3 Features
S
tation Feature Clear
Description Allows the extension user to cancel the functions set on the user’s own telephone. The following functions will be cancelled by this feature:
Absent Message Capability – The message set on the telephone
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
Background Music that has been turned on
Call Forwarding
Call Log, Incoming – Over-stored mode
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting enabled
Calling Line Identification Restriction
Connected Line Identification Restriction
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Executive Busy Override Deny
External Ringer
Log-Out Status
Message Waiting – All the messages that have been left by other extension users
Paging Deny
Paralleled Telephone enabled
Pickup Dialing
Timed Reminder
Conditions
None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Station feature clear
Feature References
None
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual
Station Feature Clear
S
Features 3-107
S
3 Features
S
tation Hunting
Description If a called extension is busy, Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the extension group. Idle extensions are automatically hunted according to the programmed type. There are five hunting types available – Circular,
Termination, UCD (Uniform Call Distribution), Voice Mail (VM), and Automated Attendant (AA).
Circular hunting: The extensions are hunted until an idle one is found, regardless of jack number.
Termination hunting: The extensions are hunted until reaching the extension which has the highest jack number in the group.
UCD: Refer to “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)” in this section.
AA hunting: All the AA ports are hunted until an idle one is found to permit AA Service.
VM hunting: All the VM ports are hunted until an idle one is found to permit VM Service.
One of the hunting types is selected for each extension group.
To leave the hunting group temporarily, use Log-Out function.
To re-join, use Log-In function.
Conditions
• If all the hunted extensions are busy, busy tone is sent to the caller.
• If the called extension has set Do Not Disturb, Call Forwarding, or
Log-Out, Station Hunting skips the extension.
• If UCD is set, the Hunting is performed as a setting of UCD.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[602] Extension Group Assignment
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Log-In / Log-Out
Operation References Not applicable.
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
3-108 Features
3 Features
S
S
tation Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Description Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed call information for outside calls. A printer connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to print incoming and outgoing outside calls and charge fee as well as print a hard copy of the System Programming. To print the record of System
Programming items that have been assigned,use the program [802]
“System Data Printout.” To print the charge fee, use the Station
Programming. To print the call records, use the program [800]
“SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout,” which allows you to print out the following records:
• Records of all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls.
• Record of incoming outside calls.
An example of printed call records:
Date Time Ext Department Code CO
24.03.94 10:03 201 12345
24.03.94 10:07 203 00001
24.03.94 10:08 204
24.03.94 10:08 205
10
01
20
10
10
Dial Number
12345678901234567
<INCOMING>
<INCOMING>
<INCOMING>
Ring
0’56
0’56
0’04
Duration
00:05'12
00:00'56
00:00'20
00:10'01
Charge
00007. 00FR
00000. 00FR
00000. 00FR
00000. 00FR
Code CD
12345
43121
43212 T
24.03.94 10:09 228
24.03.94 10:20 2103
24.03.94 13:01 201 12345
24.03.94 14:52 209 12345
•
•
•
(1)
•
•
•
•
•
•
(2) (3)
•
•
•
(4)
14 10222P1-202-346-7890
13
02
02
•
•
•
(5)
<INCOMING>
<Private>
<Private>
•
•
•
(6)
•
•
•
(7)
00:09'18
00:21'46
00011. 28FR
00000. 00FR
001
00:10'54 00012. 48FR 11111
00:03'02
•
•
•
(8)
00017 11111
•
•
•
(9)
•
•
•
F
R
•
•
•
(10) (11)
Example of SMDR printout format:
Explanation
(1) Date : shows the date of the call as Day / Month / Year.
(2) Time : shows the end time of a call as Hour:Minute.
(3) Ext : shows the extension number, floating number, etc. that engaged in a call.
(4) Department Code : shows the department code appended to the call.
(5) CO : shows the CO line number used for the call.
(6) Dial Number
Outgoing call: shows the other party’s telephone number (maximum 22 digits). Valid digits are 0 through 9, , #, P (if PAUSE button is pressed), – (if a hyphen is entered) or the mark “=” (if a Host PBX
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features 3-109
S
3 Features access code is entered).
Received call: shows <INCOMING> and if the Caller
ID is available, the calling party’s name or number is shown.
(7) Ring : shows the ring duration of the incoming call as
Hours / Minutes / Seconds.
(8) Duration : shows the duration of the call as Hours /
Minutes / Seconds.
(9) Charge : shows the amount of charge fee; Unit or Franc.
(10)Code : shows the account code appended to the call.
If the Private Call is made, “11111” is shown as a code.
(11) CD : shows the condition code.
T : Transfer
F : Call Forwarding to CO line
M : Remote Maintenance (MODEM)*
R : Receive an incoming call
A : Answer an incoming call
N : Answer an incoming call
Conditions • When programmed for outgoing toll calls only, printing occurs only for calls which start with the numbers stored in any Denied Code Table from levels 2 to 6.
• This system can store information on up to 100 calls. If more calls are initiated or received, stored records are deleted starting from the oldest one.
• This data is not deleted when you reset the system.
• “(8) Charge” is printed out in the format selected in program [117]
“Charge Display Selection.”
• It is programmable to enable or disable the printout of secret dial numbers.
• If the account code stored in location 01 of the programming table is dialed, the dialed number is not printed out to SMDR (Private Call).
Refer to the seven and eight lines on an example of printed call records.
• When the paper of the printer runs out or the printer is out-of-service, the indication “Check Printer” is displayed on the telephone of Operator 1.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.11 Printer Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[000] Date and Time Set
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format
[802] System Data Printout
3-110 Features * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3 Features
[806]–[807] Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2
[990] System Additional Information, Field (26)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Charge Fee Reference
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Charge Fee Reference
Operation References Not applicable.
S
S
tation Programming
Description Allows the proprietary telephone (PT) user to customize the extension to their needs. The following are the programming items available:
For the PT (KX-T7230; KX-T7235; KX-T7250)
Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Flexible Button Assignment
Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
Handset / Headset Selection
Intercom Alerting Assignment
Key Click Tone On / Off Assignment
Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming / Outgoing
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Station Programming Data Default Set
For display PT (KX-T7230; KX-T7235) only,
Charge Fee Reference
Self-Extension Number Confirmation
For large display PT (KX-T7235) only,
Station Speed Dialing Number / Name Assignment
For Operator extension PT only,
Remote Station Lock Control
For Operator 1 extension PT only,
Call Log Lock Control, Incoming
Detailed information and programming instructions are described in the User Manual, Station Programming.
Conditions During Station Programming, the PT is considered to be in busy status.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual
Operator Service Features...............................................User Manual
Remote Station Lock Control
Call Log Lock Control, Incoming
Features 3-111
S
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
3 Features
S
tation Programming Data Default Set
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to return all the following items programmed on the telephone to default setting.
Programming Items
Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
Handset / Headset Selection
Intercom Alerting Assignment
Key Click Tone Assignment
Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming
Preferred Line Assignment – Outgoing
Default
Tone 1
On
Handset
Tone Call
On
Ringing Line
Intercom Line
Station Programming is used to set or cancel these items at individual telephones.
Conditions None
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Station Programming Data Default Set
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Station Programming
Operation References Not applicable.
S
tation Speed Dialing
Description Allows an extension user to store frequently dialed numbers in order to place a call with abbreviated dialing. It is performed by dialing the feature number and a speed dial number from 0 through
9. Up to 10 numbers can be stored for each telephone.
Conditions • Station Speed Dialing can be followed by manual dialing to supplement the dialed digits.
3-112 Features
3 Features
S
• You may make a call with One-Touch Dialing button, instead of Station
Speed Dialing.
• The single line telephone (SLT) may be replaced to a proprietary telephone (PT) temporarily to store one-touch dialing into memory.
The Function Buttons F1 through F10 are corresponded to speed dial numbers as follows:
F1 — 0 F6 — 5
F2 — 1
F3 — 2
F4 — 3
F5 — 4
F7 — 6
F8 — 7
F9 — 8
F10 — 9
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Station speed dialing, Station speed dialing programming
Feature References Section 3, Features,
One-Touch Dialing
Operation References
PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Station Speed Dialing
S
ystem Connection*
Description System Connection allows two main units, KX-TD1232 to work together as one system. This expands the capacity of the system, number of extensions, CO lines and so on. Two connected systems are called the master and the slave systems.
A maximum capacity of the system is as follows:
Item Maximum Quantity Maximum Quantity
ISDN S0 Line
Extension Jack
DSS Console
Doorphone
Door Opener
External Pager
External Relay
External Ringer
External Sensor
Music Source
(Single System)
12
32
8
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
(System Connection)
24
64
16
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
Features 3-113 * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
S
3 Features
Conditions • The following resources can be used by either system:
(a) External pagers
(b) Music sources used for Music on Hold
(c) Music sources used for Background Music (BGM)
(d) Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR); EIA (RS-232C) ports
(e) Call Parking areas
• System Inter Connection Card (KX-TD192), optional expansion cards to connect both systems, must be installed for this feature.
• Once this feature is employed, the data adjustment in both systems are performed at the programmed time (default is 1:00) every day. The time can be changed by programming.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.8 System Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[115] Adjust Time
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
S
ystem Data Default Set
Description This system permits re-initialization of system-programmed data.
If all the programmed data is cleared, the system will restart with the default setting.
Conditions The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5.2,
Default Values.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References Section 2, Installation,
2.8 System Data Clear
3-114 Features
3 Features
S
S
ystem Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer
Description This system can be programmed and administered using a personal computer. EIA / Remote Programming & Diagnosis floppy is required to perform this feature. There are two programming methods:
On-Site Programming
By connecting a personal computer (PC) to your system, system programming and maintenance* can be performed locally. There are two ways available to perform the above:
(Method 1.) Using the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port
Connect the PC to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port provided.
The main unit has a Serial Interface (RS-232C) port which can be used for either system administration or SMDR.
* (Method 2.) Using a modem
Install the optional Remote Card. Connect the PC to an extension jack. Assign the floating number of the modem in System
Programming. Dial this number from the PC.
* Remote Programming
You can perform system programming and maintenance from a remote site using a PC. Install the Remote Card and assign the floating number of the modem in System Programming.
Starting system administration from a remote location can be done in the following ways.
• Call an extension (probably the Operator) from a remote location and request a transfer to the modem.
• Assign the modem as the destination of the DIL 1:1 feature.
Conditions
• A proprietary telephone can be used to perform System Programming.
• Only one access is allowed to System Programming at any one time.
• To access system administration, a valid password must be entered.
The password is factory-programmed and can be changed.
• System administration can be performed on-line except for the procedures of diagnosis.
Connection References Section 2, Installation,
2.4.7 Remote Card Installation*
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[107] System Password
[813] Floating Number Assignment
[814] Modem Standard
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features 3-115
S
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
3 Features
S
ystem Programming with Proprietary Telephone
Description This system can be programmed with a personal computer or a proprietary telephone (PT).
Proprietary telephones available for System Programming are:
KX-T7235; and KX-T7230 (Display Proprietary Telephones).
Two extensions are allowed to perform System Programming. The extensions available are:
(1) An extension that is connected to jack 01.
(2) An extension that is assigned as a manager.
For more information and programming instructions, refer to
Section 4, “System Programming.”
Conditions • During System Programming the system operates normally.
• During System Programming the extension is considered to be busy.
• The display on the PT permits interactive programming.
• Only one access is allowed to System Programming at any one time.
• To access system administration, a valid password must be entered.
The password is factory-programmed and can be changed.
• A personal computer can be used to perform System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[107] System Password
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
S
ystem Speed Dialing
Description This feature supports 500 abbreviated dial numbers available to all users. A system speed dial number is dialed out by pressing the
AUTO button and a 3-digit code (000 through 499). It is possible to store two hundred 24-digit telephone numbers per system
(maximum).
3-116 Features
3 Features
S
Conditions [For proprietary telephone users only]
• Speed Dialing, One-Touch Dialing, manual dialing, Last Number
Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used in combination.
[For single line telephone users only]
• If a stored feature number includes “ ” or “#,” a rotary or pulse single line telephones cannot use it.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, System speed dialing
[509]-[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialing
– Day / Night
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual System Speed Dialing
S
ystem Working Report
Description The Digital Super Hybrid System automatically records the system's working state. A printer connected to the EIA (RS-232C) port can be used to print the recorded data.
Recorded contents are as follows:
1. Date of record
• The date and time when cleared.
• The date and time when printed out.
2. Incoming calls
• The number of incoming calls
• The number of answered incoming calls
• The ratio of the answered calls to the incoming calls
Number of answered calls
Number of incoming calls
×
100 (%)
• The average time from receipt of call to answer of the incoming and answered calls.
• The average duration time of talk of the answered calls.
3. Outgoing calls
• The number of access requested
• The number of access succeeded
Features 3-117
T
3 Features
• The ratio of access succeeded
Number of access succeeded
Number of access requested
× 100
(%)
• The average duration of the dialed calls
These records can be deleted by the manager and the operator, and new data will be recorded thereafter:
Conditions Connect a printer provided with and EIA (RS-232C) connector located on the main unit. After connecting a printer, do not press the RETURN key, if provided on the printer, in 10 seconds.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation
2.3.10 Printer Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, System Working Report
[806]-[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1/ Port 2
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual System Working Report
T
erminate
Description The Terminate button is used to allow the proprietary telephone user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up first.
Conditions • Pressing the Terminate button disconnects the conversation, outputs an
SMDR record, and get an internal dial tone.
• The proprietary telephone is provided with no Terminate button originally. However a flexible CO button can be assigned as the
Terminate button either by System or Station Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
3-118 Features
3 Features
T
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Terminate Button
Feature References None
Operation References PT Features,
—User Manual Terminate
T
ime-Out, Variable
Description Provides timers to control various features or functions.
The following timers are programmable:
System Timer Items
Automatic Redial Interval Time
Range
60 – 1200s
Automatic Redial Repeated Times 1 – 12 times
Call Forwarding – No Answer Time-Out 1 – 12 rings
External Relay Time
Hold Recall Time
Intercept Routing Time-Out
Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
0 – 99 s
0 – 240 s
3 – 48 rings
0 – 64 min
Pickup Dialing Waiting Time
SMDR Duration Count Starting Time
Toll Restriction First Digit Time-Out
Toll Restriction Inter-digit Time-Out
Transfer Recall Time
1 – 8 s
0 – 60 s
5 – 120 s
5 – 30 s
3 – 48 rings
Extension Timer Items
Delayed Ringing Count Disable / Immediate /
1 / 3 / 6 rings / No ring
Voice Mail Integration Timer Items
DTMF Signal Duration
DTMF Signal Waiting Time after VPS Answer
DTMF Signal Waiting Time after VPS calls Extension
80 / 160 ms
0.5 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 s
0.5 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 s
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
Features 3-119
T
3 Features
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
[203] Intercept Time
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time
[213] External Relay Connecting Time
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (6) through (8)
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable.
T
imed Reminder
Description Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm ringing at a preset time as a wake up or reminder. This feature can be programmed to be active only once or everyday. When the user goes off-hook during the alarm tone, Time Announce or the dial tone 3 is sent. When setting, the set time can be heard by Time Stamp function.
Conditions • Be sure that the system clock works.
• Setting a new time clears the preset time when either the operator or the extension set the time.
• The alarm ringing continues for 30 seconds. To stop it, lift the handset or, with a proprietary telephone, press any button.
• If the displayed language is assigned to German in the [101] Language
Assignment program, Time Announce is sent when the user goes offhook or sets the time, but if another language is assigned, the dial tone 3 or a confirmation tone is sent.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed reminder
[101] Language Assignment
Feature References Section 4, Features,
HOTEL APPLICATION – Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Timed Reminder
3-120 Features
3 Features
T
T
oll Restriction
Description Toll Restriction is in conjunction with the assigned Class of
Service, can prohibit certain extension users from placing unauthorized toll calls.
Every extension is programmed to belong to one of eight Classes of
Service. Each Class of Service is programmed to have a toll restriction level for day mode and night mode.
There are eight toll restriction levels available. Toll restriction level
1 is the highest level and the level 8 is the lowest. That is, level 1 allows all toll calls and levels 7 and 8 disallows all toll calls.
Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed deny and excepted code tables.
The pre-assigned emergency numbers such as “110” and “112” are allowed to call in a any levels.
Denied Code Tables
An outgoing outside call made by an extension with a toll restriction level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the selected Denied Code Tables. If the leading seven digits of the dialed number (not including the line access code) are not found in the table, the call is made. There are five system programs for
Denied Code Tables:[301]-[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for
Levels 2 through 6: each program is used to make up a Denied
Code Table for Levels 2 through 6 respectively.
Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited.
These numbers are defined as denied codes. Each table can store up to 20 denied codes, each of which consisting of seven digits.
Excepted Code Tables
These tables are used to override a programmed denied code. A call denied by the selected Denied Code Tables is checked against the selected Excepted Code Tables, and if a match is found, the call is made.
There are five system programs for these tables:
[306]-[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6: each programming is used to make up an Excepted Code Table for
Levels 2 through 6.
Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes. These numbers are defined as excepted codes. Each table can store up to 20 excepted codes, each of which consisting of seven digits.
Features 3-121
T
3 Features
Features
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
Level 7
Level 8
Applicable Denied and Excepted Code Tables depend on the assigned toll restriction level of an extension as follows:
Denied Code Tables
None
Table for Level 2
Tables for Levels 2 and 3
Tables for Levels 2 to 4
Tables for Levels 2 to 5
Tables for Levels 2 to 6
None
None
Excepted Code Tables
None
Tables for Levels 2 through 6
Tables for Levels 3 through 6
Tables for Levels 4 through 6
Tables for Levels 5 through 6
Tables for Level 6
None
None
[Explanation]
Level 1: allows all calls.
Level 2: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in Excepted
Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6.
Level 3: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6.
Level 4: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 4 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 4 through 6.
Level 5: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 5 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 5 and 6.
Level 6: • denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Table for Level 6.
• denied intercom calls except operator calls.
Level 7: Allows intercom calls only.
Level 8: Allows operator calls only.
Example of Toll Restriction programming
Here is an example to explain the procedures for Toll Restriction programming.
1. Determining the application
Determine the dialing numbers that should be denied for levels 2 through 6. (Levels 1, 7 and 8 are fixed and do not require programming.)
3-122
3 Features
[ Entry Example]
Level
2
3
4
5
6
Denied Code
011
011
976
1xxx976
011
976
1xxx976
0
011
976
1xxx976
0
411
1xxx555
011
976
1xxx976
0
411
1xxx555
1 x0 x1
Note: “x” substitutes a digit.
Excepted Code
None
None
None
None
911
1911
130
2. Programming
(1) [500]-[501] Toll Restriction Assignment
Assign a toll restriction level to each Class of Service (COS).
[Example]
COS
1
2
:
8
Level (Day)
1
2
:
8
Level (Night)
6
6
:
8
T
Features 3-123
T
3 Features
(2) [301]-[305] Denied Code Table Entry
Depending on the application, enter the denied codes in the associated tables. You can use numeric characters and the wild card character “ .”
Level-2 Denied Code Table
Location
01
:
:
20
001
Code
Level-5 Denied Code Table
Location
01
02
:
20
411
1
Code
555
Level-3 Denied Code Table
Location
01
02
:
20
976
1
Code
976
Level-6 Denied Code Table
Location
01
02
03
:
20
1
0
1
Code
Level-4 Denied Code Table
Location
01
:
:
20
0
Code
(3) [306]-[310] Excepted Code Table Entry
Depending on the application, enter the excepted codes in the associated tables. You can use numeric characters and the wild card character “ .”
Level-6 Excepted Code Table
Location
1
2
•
•
•
3
20
911
1911
130
Code
[Explanation]
If your Toll Restriction Level is 6; a) You cannot make a call whose toll call number is “201,” because the number whose second digit “0” is one of the Denied Codes for
Level 6.
b) You can make a call whose toll call number is “130.” Though the number whose first digit “1” is one of the Denied Codes for
Level 6, the number “130” is one of the Excepted Codes for Level
6. The Excepted Codes override the Denied Codes.
3-124 Features
3 Features
Flow Chart of
Toll Restriction
The user makes a toll call.
Is the call made by System Speed
Dialing ?
No
Yes
Check the level for System
Speed Dialing.
T
Levels 7, 8
What is the extension – toll restriction level?
Level 1
Levels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Is the dialed number found in applicable Denied Code Tables?
Yes
No
Is the dialed number found in applicable Excepted Code Tables?
No
Yes
The call is denied. Reorder
Tone is returned to the user.
The call is allowed.
Features 3-125
T
3 Features
Conditions • Toll restriction checks are applied to the following:
(1) Account Code Entry
(2) Dial Access, Automatic
(3) Line Access, CO Line Group
(4) Line Access, Individual
• If a stored Host PBX access code is found in the dialed number, a toll restriction check starts for succeeding telephone number.
• Toll restriction for System Speed Dialing can be assigned in the Class of Service setting.
• It is programmable whether the “ ” or “#” the user dials is to be checked or not on the Toll Restriction code. This is useful to prevent unauthorized calls which could be possible through certain Central
Offices’ exchange system.
• It is programmable to admit the press of the FLASH button, during an outside call on the extensions in Levels 7 and 8.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[009] Emergency Dial Number Set
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
[301]–[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
[306]–[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
[509]-[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialing
– Day / Night
[990] System Additional Information, Field (14)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction Override by
Account Code Entry
Operation References Not applicable.
Toll Restriction Override for
System Speed Dialing
T
oll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
Description Allows the extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone. The user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before dialing the telephone number.
Conditions • The toll restriction level of the user is changed to level 2 by this feature.
Thus this can be used by extension users assigned a toll restriction level from 3 through 6. The levels 1 and 2 are not changed.
3-126 Features
3 Features
T
• A Class of Service which is assigned Account Code Entry – Verified
Toll Restriction Override permits the class members to override their toll restrictions.
• Up to 40 account codes can be programmed for Verified Account code operation. These are used for Toll Restriction Override.
• If the user does not enter any account code or enters an invalid account code, an ordinary toll restriction check is done.
Flow Chart of TRS Override by Account Code Entry
TRS Override by Account Code Entry is attempted.
No
Option Verified - All Calls
What is the account code mode?
Verified - Toll Restriction Override
Is the entered code identified with the stored codes?
Yes
Yes
Is the TRS level Level 1?
Is the entered code identified with the stored code?
No
Yes No
TRS level changes to Level 2.
Toll Restriction check starts.
The call is not allowed.
Reorder tone is returned to the user.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Account Code Entry Toll Restriction
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Toll Restriction Override — Toll Restriction Override by Account Code
Entry
Features 3-127
T
3 Features
T
oll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing
Description Calls originated by System Speed Dialing are restricted depending on the extension’s toll restriction level for System Speed Dialing.
Conditions Same as the conditions of Toll Restriction feature except that the data for
System Speed Dialing are used as the toll restriction levels.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, System Speed Dialing
[509]-[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialing – Day /
Night
Feature References Section 3, Features,
System Speed Dialing
Operation References
Not applicable.
Toll Restriction
T
runk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Description A tone signal is sent from the external pager or the external ringer when an incoming outside call is received. Any extension user can answer the call.
Conditions • Connect a user-supplied external device (pager or ringer).
• Two external pagers can be installed per system. One external ringer can be installed per system.
• Floating numbers of devices are programmable.
• TAFAS can be used in the following cases: a) The floating number of an external device is assigned as the
DIL 1:1 destination. In this case all the incoming calls on the specified line will be signaled.
b) The floating number of an external device is assigned as the
Intercept Routing destination. In this case incoming calls redirected to the destination will be signaled.
c) The floating number of an external device is assigned as the
Direct Dialing In destination.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user before being connected to the caller. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
3-128 Features
3 Features
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.8 External Relay, External Ringer and External Sensor Connection
2.3.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external answer / TAFAS answer,
External ringer, External ringer answer
[418] External Ringer Assignment
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[813] Floating Number Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
External Ringer Paging – External
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
T
T
wo-Way Recording into Voice Mailbox
†
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to record the conversation into one's mailbox or another mailbox, while talking on the phone.
Note:
When you record Two-Way telephone conversations, you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded.
Conditions • A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Two-Way Record button or a Two-Way Transfer button.
• When all the voice mail ports are busy, pressing the Two-Way Record button sends an alarm tone.
• When all the voice mail ports are busy, pressing the Two-Way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone.
Programming References
System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming,
Flexible Button Assignment — Two-Way Record Button, Two-Way
Transfer Button
Feature References None
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Features
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
3-129
T
Operation References PT Features,
Two-Way Recording into Voice Mailbox
3 Features
U
niform Call Distribution (UCD)
Description
Conditions
Allows an incoming calls (CO line, extension) to be distributed uniformly to a specific group of extensions called UCD group.
Calls to a UCD group hunt for an idle station in circular way, starting at the extension following the last one called. This UCD feature is particularly helpful when certain extension receives a high volume of calls compared with other extensions.
Log-In / Log-Out feature is available for UCD.
• UCD can be used in the following cases: a) The floating number of UCD is assigned as the DIL 1:1 destination.
3-130 Features
3 Features
An outline sketch of UCD is shown below.
(1) When a number of calls have been arrived at a UCD group, the 1st call arrives at extension A first.
Calls have arrived at a UCD group
3rd call is in the queue
2nd call is in the queue
1st call is in the queue
UCD group
Extension A
(When extension A is busy or UCD log out has been set in extension A, the call arrives at extension B.)
Extension B
(When extension B is busy or UCD log out has been set in extension B, the call arrives at extension C.)
Extension C
(When extension C is busy or UCD log out has been set in extension C, the call arrives at extension A.)
U
(2) When the 1st call arrives at extension A, the 2nd call arrives at extension B.
3rd call is in the queue
2nd call is in the queue
UCD group
Extension B
(When extension B is busy or UCD log out has been set to extension B, the call arrives at extension C.)
Extension C
Extension A
(3) When the 2nd call arrives at extension C, the 3rd call will arrive at extension A.
Features 3-131
U
3 Features b) The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Intercept Routing destination.
c) The floating number of UCD is dialed from the extension.
d) The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Direct Dialing In destination.
• This feature requires assignment of UCD group in the System
Programming. An extension cannot belong to two or more UCD groups.
• The floating number can be assigned on UCD group basis. The UCD group is based on Extension group.
• It is possible to set the log-in or log-out status on extension basis. UCD call can arrive at the extension in log-in status within the UCD group, and cannot arrive at the extensions in log-out status. If the extension would like to leave the group temporarily, the extension will set in logout status by the feature number to prevent UCD calls being sent to their extensions. When the extension re-joins the group, the extension will set in log-in status.
• There should be at least one extension that is in log-in status.
• The following extension should not belong to the extension group which is assigned as a UCD group; a) The extension is assigned as an XDP-enable extension in program
[600].
b) The extension is assigned as a disconnect extension in program
[611].
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Feature Reference Section 3, Features,
Extension Group
Log-In / Log-Out
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Uniform Call Distribution (UCD )
Station Hunting
U
ser Programming (Manager Programming)
Description User Programming (Manager Programming) can be programmed by the end user. Programs [000] through [014] can be changed by the user.
Conditions None
3-132 Features
3 Features
V
Programming References
User Programming ...........................................................User Manual,
Feature References None
Operation References Not applicable
V
oice Mail Integration
Description This system can accommodate Voice Processing System (VPS) equipment, which offers the user a Voice Mail and an Automated
Attendant Services. If an extension user has set Call Forwarding destination to the VPS, a calling party will be forwarded to the VPS and can leave a voice message in the mailbox of the extension.
When a call is transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding or
Intercept Routing – No Answer features, the mailbox number is sent to the VPS automatically with DTMF signaling (Follow On
ID). Up to eight extension jacks can be connected to VPS as extensions in the system.
System Explanation
1. Voice Mail Service
1.1 Call Forwarding to VM
If an extension user sets Call Forwarding (C. FWD) whose destination is the VPS, an incoming call is forwarded to the
VPS under the proper conditions. The system sends to the
VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at that time. Therefore the calling party can leave his / her message in the mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the mailbox number.
Features 3-133
V
3 Features
Outside Call
DIL 1:1
System
Intercom
Call
Extension
C. FWD
VPS
VM 1
VM X
VM Hunting
Chain
VM 2
VM 3
Outside Call
DIL 1:1
System
Operator
Transfer
Extension
C. FWD
VPS
VM 1
VM X
VM Hunting
Chain
VM 2
VM 3
1.2 Intercept Routing to VM
If a CO line is set as Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA) whose destination is the VPS, an outside call is forwarded to the VPS under the proper conditions. The system sends to the VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at that time. Therefore the calling party can leave his / her message in the mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the mailbox number.
3-134 Features
3 Features
V
Outside Call
DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N
System
Extension
IRNA
VPS
VM 1
VM X
VM Hunting
Chain
VM 2
VM 3
1.3 Transferring to VM
The extension user can transfer an outside call to the VPS so that calling party can leave his / her message in the mailbox of the desired extension. The extension user should use the
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the VPS. Pressing this button and entering the extension number allows the extension user to transfer the call to the mailbox of the corresponding extension.
Outside Call
System
Extension busy/no answer
(1) Transfer
(2) Transfer
Extension
(Operator) by VM Transfer
Button
VPS
VM 1
VM X
VM Hunting
Chain
VM 2
VM 3
Features 3-135
V
3 Features
1.4 Changing from VM to Automated Attendant (AA)
The Automated Attendant Service is automatically activated in the following cases:
1) The incoming call is not answered by the operator and
IRNA is activated.
2) The operator is assigned as a destination of DIL 1:1 and the operator sets the Call Forwarding to VPS.
Outside Call
DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N
System
Operator
C.FWD, IRNA
VM → AA 1
VPS
VM → AA 2
VM → AA X VM → AA 3
1.5 Listening to a Recorded Message
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS can turn on the
MESSAGE button indicator of the corresponding telephone as a notification to the user of the telephone. (Panasonic KX-
TVP series can do this.) The VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his / her mailbox. When the MESSAGE button indicator is lit, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the stored message.
2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service
2.1 AA to Extension
AA receives and answers an outside call and offers services such as transferring to a specified extension or the corresponding mailbox by the DTMF signaling which is sent from the calling party.
3-136 Features
3 Features
V
Outside Call
DIL 1:1
System
Extension
Transfer
VPS
AA 1
AA X
AA Hunting
Chain
AA 2
AA 3
Conditions • A VPS can be assigned as the destination of the following features:
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Call Forwarding – No Answer
Intercept Routing – No Answer
In these functions, the caller to the extension need not know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS (Follow On ID function). If a DIL
1:N call is transferred to the VPS by IRNA, your system transmits the mailbox number of the lowest jack number of the receiving extensions.
• A mailbox number is a respective extension number by default. The mailbox number can be changed, only if program [990] “System
Additional Information, Field (18)” is set to “free.”
• Pressing the Voice Mail Transfer button and dialing the extension number allows the extension user to transfer to the corresponding mailbox. In this case, Follow On ID function is available.
• The Voice Mail extension should be set to Data Line Security to achieve proper recording.
• It is recommended that you do not connect more than VM ports to each card or unit.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.2 Extension Connection
2.4.5 Extension Connection
Features 3-137
V
3 Features
Programming References
Common Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb,
Message waiting
[113] VM Status DTMF Set
[114] VM Command DTMF Set
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (6) through (9), (18)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – MESSAGE Button Voice Mail (VM)
Transfer Button
For VM Service Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type (Select Voice Mail Hunting.)
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (10), (36), (37)
For AA Service Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type (Select Automated Attendant Hunting.)
[990] System Additional Information, Field (24)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy
Call Forwarding – Busy / No
Answer
Call Forwarding – No Answer
Intercept Routing
Station Hunting
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual Voice Mail Integration
Operator Service Features,
Voice Mail Transfer
V
oice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones
†
Description The Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing
System Can be connected to the Digital Super Hybrid System
(DSHS) in a tightly integrated fashion.
The system sends the VPS data which contains the extension number configuration information and the VPS automatically creates mailboxes with this data (Automatically Configuration —
Quick Setup).
3-138 Features †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
3 Features
V
Conditions • A maximum of one VPS can be connected to each DSHS cabinet.
• A maximum of 3 DSHS jacks can be connected to a proprietary telephone capable VPS. Because a proprietary telephone connection supports up to two simultaneous voice calls, only one DSHS jack needs to be connected for each 2 VPS ports.
• Connect the jacks and ports in ascending order. In other words, the lowest number DSHS jack used for VPS connection must be connected to the lowest number VPS port.
• The VPS data is transmitted to the VPS on the lowest jacks port.
Programming References
[126] Voice Mail Number Assignment
[127] Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment
[128] Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment
[617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration
Operation References Not applicable
V
olume Control – Speaker / Ringer
Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to turn up or down the following volumes as desired:
Ringer volume
Speaker volume
Conditions The control method depends on the telephone type:
• With a proprietary telephone, press the volume control button
(VOLUME
∧
/
∨
UP / DOWN) to select a desired volume level.
However the ringer volume of KX-T7250 is selected with Ringer
Volume Selector (OFF/LOW/HIGH).
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References None
Operation References Configuration,
—User Manual Volume Control – Ringer / Speaker
Features 3-139
Section 4
System Programming
This section provides step-by-step programming instructions for a proprietary telephone.
4.1
General Programming Instructions
Default Setting
This system has a default factory setting. If any of the programming needs to be changed, you will find the necessary information in Section 3, “Features.” This makes the system very simple to install and customize as required by the customer. Any required changes can be written on “Programming Tables.”
Required Telephone Set
One of the following telephone sets is required for System
Programming:
• Proprietary Telephone (PT): KX-T7235, KX-T7230
Extensions Used for Programming
Connect one of the above-mentioned telephone sets to either of the following:
• Jack number 1
• Jack programmed as a manager extension
To assign the manager extension, see Section 4.2 [006]
“Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day/Night.”
• All jacks for Manager Programming [000] through [014]
4-2 System Programming
4.1.1
Using the Proprietary Telephone
Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display PT
Three soft buttons are provided just below the display on the display Proprietary Telephones (PT). The functions of these soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance from step to step. Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are shown on the lower line of the display. (See “Viewing the Display” on page 4-6 for more information on the display lines.)
If the SHIFT button indicator is on, two functions are available with each soft button. To alternate between the two functions, press the SHIFT button on the right side of the display.
Soft button variations
Type 1
CLR NEXT
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
Example:
KX-T7230 Display
Buttons
Type 2
SKP+ CLR NEXT
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
Press SHIFT to alternate
SKPPREV
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
Type 3
—> SEL+ NEXT
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
Press SHIFT to alternate
<— SEL- PREV
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
System Programming 4-3
4.1.1
Using the Proprietary Telephone
Type 4
A B C
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
Press SHIFT to alternate
a b c
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
Type 5
SKP+ SEL NEXT
Press SHIFT to alternate
SKPCLR PREV
Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT
You can use either the soft buttons or the overlay buttons. (For overlay buttons, refer to “Using the Overlay” below.)
Throughout the programming you will see instructions such as
“Press PREV.” If you use the soft buttons, this means press
SHIFT, release SHIFT and then press Soft 3. The (PREV) function is performed.
Note If you use the soft buttons and if programming instructions tell you to press the following buttons, you may press soft buttons shown below.
Instructions
SELECT
CLEAR
Soft button
SEL+,SEL-,or SEL
CLR
Using the Overlay
A programming overlay is packed with the main unit at the factory.
This overlay should be used at all times while in programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change while in programming mode as follows: (The original names are in parentheses.)
4-4 System Programming
4.1.1
Using the Proprietary Telephone
During Operation
(PAUSE)
(SP-PHONE)
(REDIAL)
(AUTO ANSWER / MUTE)
(FLASH)
(TRANSFER)
(FWD/DND)
(CONF)
(INTERCOM )
(AUTO DIAL / STORE)
(HOLD)
During Programming
PAUSE / PROGRAM
NEXT
PREV (PREVIOUS)
SELECT
FLASH
CLEAR
→
–
←
SECRET
STORE
END
Location of Controls with the Overlay
The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the KX-
T7235 and KX-T7230 while in programming mode.
SECRET
1QZ!?
1
4GHI
4
7PRS
7
ä / ö + ü –
PREV
2ABC
2
5JKL
5
8TUV
8
0 . , ’ : ;
0
FLASH
3DEF
3
6MNO
6
9WXY
9
# $ % & = ( )
PAUSE CLEAR
UP
DOWN
STORE
SELECT
CLEAR NEXT
SECRET
1QZ!?
1
4GHI
4
7PRS
7
ä / ö + ü –
PREV
2ABC
2
5JKL
5
8TUV
8
0 . , ’ : ;
0
FLASH
3DEF
3
6MNO
6
9WXY
9
# $ % & = ( )
PAUSE CLEAR
UP
DOWN
STORE
SELECT
CLEAR NEXT
KX-T7230
Viewing the Display
KX-T7235
The display gives you helpful information, such as what you should do now, what you have done, etc..
The KX-T7230 and the KX-T7235 both utilize two information lines for programming. The upper line is called the Message Line and the lower one is called the Function Line.
System Programming 4-5
4.1.1
Using the Proprietary Telephone
The Message Line (upper) shows you what you should do or what you should select. It also allows you to confirm what you have just entered. The display capacity is 16 digits. If your entry exceeds the capacity, you can shift the display by pressing
→ or
← button.
The Function Line (lower) shows the current function of the soft buttons. These functions change with the programming procedures.
SYS-PGM NO? ->
NEXT
KX-T7230 Display
←
Message Line
→
←
Function Line
→
SYS-PGM NO? ->
NEXT
KX-T7235 Display
←
Message Line
←
Function Line
Before entering the programming mode
Before entering programming mode, confirm that:
• Your telephone is on-hook.
• No calls are on hold at your telephone.
Entering the programming mode
To program any programming mode:
Press PROGRAM + + # and enter your System Password
(default=1234).
• The display shows the Initial Message: SYS-PGM NO? ->
To enter the only Manager Programming mode, the system password is not necessary as follows:
Press PROGRAM + 0 + 0 .
• The display shows the Initial Message: MNG-PGM NO? ->
Notes • If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM button is pressed, it is cancelled.
• The System Password entered is not shown on the display. The System
Password can be changed by System Programming. Refer to Section
4.3 [107] “System Password.”
• During the programming mode, your extension is treated as a busy extension.
• Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time.
4-6 System Programming
4.1.2
Programming Ways
Advancing to the next stage
When “ SYS-PGM NO? -> ” is displayed, you can select one of the following:
• To go to program [000], press the NEXT button.
• To go to another program, enter the 3-digit program address.
Rotation of jack number
Each jack of our Digital Super Hybrid System supports the connection of a proprietary telephone and an analog device with different extension numbers (eXtra Device Port: XDP function).
To program this function it is necessary to assign two parts for each jack. The first part of jack one is 01-1. The second part of jack one is 01-2. The first part of jack two is 02-1 and so on. The NEXT and PREV buttons can be used to move from jack to jack as required.
Example;
NEXT
#01-1
PREV
#01-2
NEXT
PREV
#02-1
NEXT
PREV
#02-2 ......
Note The first part of a jack is for a PT of a XDP-assigned jack. The second part is for a single line device. Program [600] “EXtra Device Port” assigns which jacks are XDP.
Storing your data
Press STORE to store your data.
• The STORE indicator lights red and confirmation tone sounds.
* Confirmation tone (one beep)
After pressing STORE, you will hear a beep. This informs you that your storage is completed.
* Alarm tone (three beeps)
If you hear the alarm, check that your entry is valid.
Making another selection within the same program address
• To make the next higher selection, press NEXT
• To make the previous selection, press PREV
• To make a specific selection, press SELECT and then enter the number.
System Programming 4-7
4.1.2
Programming Ways
Going to another program address
After pressing STORE, you can go to another program with either of the following two methods:
(1) • To go to the next larger program address:
Press Soft 1 (SKP+) or VOLUME (DOWN).
• To go to the next smaller program address:
Press SHIFT + Soft 1 (SKP–) or VOLUME (UP).
(2) To go to a specific program address:
Press ENDE, then enter the program address.
Method (1) is useful when you want to perform a series of programs consecutively. For example, to change the programming in addresses [000] to [011], use this method. You can move from
[000] to [001], from [001] to [002], and so on by pressing the
SKP+ or VOLUME . You can move in reverse order from
[008] to [007], etc. by pressing the SKP– or VOLUME .
This method can also be used to move between neighboring program groups: For example, you can move between the program addresses [011] and [100], [123] and [200], and so on. Also, you can move between the smallest program address [000] and the largest one [992].
Method (2) is useful when you wish to jump to another program address. For example, you have just finished with program [006] and now you want to go to program [301]. Neither SKP+/
VOLUME nor SKP– or VOLUME is convenient in this case. So you should press END and enter 301.
Note The following programming instructions suppose that you have already entered programming mode and that you will use Method (2).
Confirming the entries
You may review the stored programming without making any changes.
Going back to the operation mode
Two ways are available to go back to the operation mode:
(1) Lift the handset while in programming mode.
(2) When the Initial Message: SYS-PGM NO? –> is displayed, press the PROGRAM button.
(To display the Initial Message, press END.)
4-8 System Programming
4.1.3
Entering Characters
You can enter characters to store names for speed dial numbers, extension numbers, etc., by using the dialing key pad and the buttons.
Each of twelve dialing keys on the dialing key pad has seven characters assigned. See the Combination Tables below.
Step 1.
Press
Press
Step 2.
Soft 1
(SHIFT)
Q
1 q
A
2 a
3
4
D d
G g
5
6
7
8
9 p
T t
W w j
J
M m
P
0
#
.
/
ä
$
%
Soft 2
’
,
X x r
U u
K k
N n
R
ö
+
&
=
(SHIFT)
Z z
B b
H h
E e
Soft 3
;
:
Y y s
V v
L l
O o
S
ü
–
(
)
(SHFT)
!
?
C c i
I
F f
Combination Table 1
* Press SHIFT to alternate between Capital and small letters.
Pressing
SELECT
(Times)
Keys
7
8
9
5
6
3
4
1
2
0
*
#
0
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
9
0
*
#
1 2
ä
$ g j m p t q a d w
.
/
%
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
3 4 z b e h r u k n x
’
+
=
H
K
N
R
U
Z
B
E
X
,
ö
&
Combination Table 2
5 6
?
i f c s v l o y
;
–
)
!
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
:
ü
(
System Programming 4-9
4.1.3
Entering Characters
To select a desired character, press the key which has.
For example, to select the letter “M”:
Select either of the following two methods:
(1) Using the SHIFT and Soft buttons (for display PT only)
* See Combination Table 1.
1. Press 6. (“M” belongs to “6.”)
• The Function Line shows: M N O
2. Press the Soft 1 (M) button.
(Press SHIFT to display the lower case of the above letters.)
(2) Using the SELECT button
* See Combination Table 2.
1. Press 6. (“M” belongs to “6.”)
2. Press the SELECT button once.
• Pressing the SELECT button an appropriate number of times gives you the desired letter. Pressing SELECT twice gives the letter “m,” pressing three times gives “N,” and so on.
Example of entering characters: to enter “Mike”:
Using method (1)
* See Combination Table 1.
1.
Enter 6.
2.
Press Soft 1 ( M ).
3.
Enter 4.
4.
Press SHIFT.
5.
Press Soft 3 ( i ).
6.
Enter 5.
7. Press Soft 2 ( k ).
8.
Enter 3.
The display shows:
6
M N O
M
M N O
M4
G H I
M4 g h i
Mi g h i
Mi5 j k l
Mik j k l
Mik3 d e f
4-10 System Programming
4.1.3
Entering Characters
9.
Press Soft 2 ( e ).
Mike d e f
Using method (2)
* See Combination Table 2.
The display shows:
1. Enter 6.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Enter 4.
4. Press SELECT six times.
5. Enter 5.
6. Press SELECT four times.
7. Enter 3.
8. Press SELECT four times.
6
M
M4
Mi
Mi5
Mik
Mik3
Mike
Notes • To erase all the letters, press CLEAR.
• To erase the last letter, press
←
.
System Programming 4-11
4.1.4
Example of Programming
The following programming instructions suppose that you have already entered programming mode and that you will employ method (2) on page 4-8.
Example: Program [001] “System Speed Dialing Number Set”
001
(1)
Sample of Description
4.2 Manager Programming (2)
System Speed Dialing Number Set ( 3)
Description
(4)
Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers. These numbers are available to all extension users. The stored numbers are also applied to Caller ID and Call Log, Incoming Features.
Selection
(5)
• Speed dial number: 000 through 499
• Telephone number: 24 digits (max.)
Default
(6)
Programming
(7)
All speed dial numbers – Not Stored.
1. Enter 001.
(8)
Display: SPD Number Set
(9)
2. Press NEXT.
(10)
Display: SPD Code?->
(11)
3. Enter a speed dial number.
To enter speed dial number 000, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 000:Not
Stored
(12)
4. Enter a telephone number. (13)
To delete the current entry, press
CLEAR.
(14)
To change the current entry, press
CLEAR and the new number.
5. Press STORE.
(15)
6. To program another speed dial number, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and the desired speed dial number.
(16)
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6. (17)
8. Press END. (18)
Conditions (19)
• There is a maximum of 500 speed dial numbers. Each speed dial
Explanation
(1) Program address: This address is printed at the top of every page to allow you to quickly find the desired program.
(2) Running title: tells you which group the program belongs to.
(3) Program title.
(4) Provides a more detailed description of the program.
(5) Shows you choices that you can assign.
(6) Shows you the default (factory setting).
(7) Shows you programming procedures step by step.
• While programming, use the overlay.
• Before starting to program, enter the programming mode. (See “Entering the programming mode” on page 4-6.)
(8) Enter the program address.
(9) The display shows the program title. If your telephone has soft buttons, the lower line shows the functions that are currently assigned to them.
(10) Press either Soft 3 (NEXT) shown on the display or the NEXT shown on the overlay.
(11) The message line advises you to enter a speed dial number.
(12) If the telephone number has already been stored, the number is displayed.
(13) Enter the telephone number that you want to store.
Your entry is displayed as you enter the digits.
(14) Pressing CLEAR erases the whole entry.
(15) Your entry is now stored.
The indicator lights red and confirmation tone lets you know that the storage is completed.
(16) Select the best way for you to store another speed dial number. Pressing the NEXT / PREV allows you to select the next higher / lower speed dial number. You can also keep pressing them until the desired one is displayed. If you press SELECT
4-12 System Programming
4.1.4
Example of Programming
001
Sample of Description
4.2 Manager Programming
System Speed Dialing Number Set (contd.) number has a maximum of 24 digits.
The valid characters are 0 through
(hyphen) buttons.
•
•
•
•
•
Feature References
(20)
Section 3, Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Caller ID
•
•
•
Explanation and the desired speed dial number, the selected code is displayed.
(17) You can continue to program another entry.
(18) After you have stored all your entries, finish this program by pressing END. After pressing END you can go to any program address you desire.
You can return to the Initial Message mode any time by pressing END.
To go to the next lager program address, do not press END but press Soft 1 (SKP+) or
VOLUME .
To go to the next smaller program address, do not press END but press SHIFT + Soft 1 (SKP-) or
VOLUME .
(19) Tells you what you should notice or consider when doing the programming.
(20) Lists all of the features related to the programming. These features are described in
Section 3.
Programming Structure
Program Address
[000] – [014]
[100] – [128]
[200] – [215]
[301] – [310]
[400] – [428]
[500] – [517]
[600] – [617]
[800] – [814]
[990] – [991]
Programming Group
Manager Programming
System Programming
Timer Programming
TRS Programming
CO Line Programming
COS Programming
Extension Programming
Resource Programming
Option Programming
Description
These programs may be accessed by the system manager of the customer to meet frequent changes requested by the customer.
Entire system programming.
Flexible system timer setting.
Assignment of Toll Restriction.
Setting of CO line and CO line values.
Setting of Class of Service (COS).
Setting of extension values.
Assignment of customer-supplied peripherals connected to the system.
Used to answer the user’s requirements or troubles, if needed.
System Programming 4-13
000 4.2
Manager Programming
Date and Time Set
NOTICE
It is assumed that you have read Section 4.1 “General Programming Instructions.” The use of the soft buttons is discussed in the section, therefore we will not make any reference to them in the following instructions. At any time the soft buttons can be used in place of the overlay keys.
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Sets the current date and time.
• Day: 1 through 31
• Month: Jan through Dec
• Year: 00 through 99
• Day of the week: SUN / MON / TUE / WED / THU / FRI / SAT
• Hour: 00 through 23
• Minute: 00 through 59
1 Jan ’94 SAT 00:00
1.
Enter 000.
Display: Day/Time Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: 1 Jan ’94 SAT
3.
Enter the day.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new day.
4.
Press
→
.
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed.
6.
Press
→
.
7.
Enter the year.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new year.
8.
Press
→
.
9.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is displayed.
10.
Press STORE.
4-14 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
Date and Time Set
(contd.)
000
11.
Press NEXT.
Display example: 00:00
12.
Enter the hour.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new hour.
13. Press
→
.
14. Enter the minute.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new minutes.
15. Press STORE.
16. Press END.
Conditions • After changing an entry, you can press STORE. You do not have to perform all of the rest of the steps.
• To go back to the previous field, press
← at steps 4 through 9 and steps
13 through 14.
• If you hear the alarm after pressing STORE, check that the date is valid.
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
• The time is adjusted automatically, if the first outgoing call is made after three o’clock each morning.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Display, Time and Date
System Programming 4-15
001
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
4.2
Manager Programming
System Speed Dialing Number Set
Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers. These numbers are available to all extension users. The stored numbers are also applied to Caller ID and Call Log, Incoming Features.
• Speed dial number: 000 through 499
• Telephone number: 24 digits (max.)
All speed dial numbers – Not stored
1. Enter 001.
Display: SPD Number Set
2. Press NEXT.
Display: SPD Code?–>
3. Enter a speed dial number.
To enter speed dial number 000, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 000: Not Stored
4.
Enter a telephone number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another speed dial number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired speed dial number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of 500 speed dial numbers. Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits. The valid characters are 0 through 9, , and # keys, SECRET and – (hyphen) buttons.
– To store a hyphen, press the “–” button.
– To prevent the display of all or part of the number, press SECRET before and after confidential parts of the number. The SECRET button must always be entered in a pair. Or your entry is not stored. (Refer to Section 3 “Secret Dialing.”)
4-16 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
System Speed Dialing Number Set
(contd.)
001
• If you are storing an external number, include the line access code
(default=0, 81 through 88) before the number. For Caller ID and Call
Log, Incoming feature; When – (hyphen) precedes a phone number, the
Caller ID check starts on the phone number. Example : 0 - 12345678
• If you are storing an account code, enter the account code before the line access code. Example : 49 12345#0 - 12345678
(Refer to Section 3 “Account Code Entry.”)
• It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by storing it in two speed dial numbers. A line access code should not be stored in the second speed dial number.
• To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display, press
→ or
←
.
• Program [002] “System Speed Dialing Name Set” is used to give names to speed dial numbers.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Caller ID
Special Features for KX-T7235 — System Speed Dialing
System Speed Dialing
Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
System Programming 4-17
002 4.2
Manager Programming
System Speed Dialing Name Set
Description Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in program [001] “System Speed Dialing Number Set.” The KX-
T7235 shows the stored name when performing System Speed
Dialing. The stored names are applied to the Caller ID and Call
Log – Incoming features.
Selection • Speed dial number: 000 through 499
• Name: 10 characters (max.)
Default
Programming
All speed dial numbers – Not stored
1.
Enter 002.
Display: SPD Name Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: SPD Code?–>
3.
Enter a speed dial number.
To enter speed dial number 000, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 000: Not Stored
4.
Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another speed dial number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired speed dial number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Speed dial numbers are programmed in program [001] “System
Speed Dialing Number Set.”
• There is a maximum of 500 names. Each name has a maximum of 10 characters.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Caller ID
Special Features for KX-T7235 — System Speed Dialing
System Speed Dialing
4-18 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
Extension Number Set
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
003
Assigns an extension number to each extension.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16 (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64 (-1 / -2)
(-1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Extension Number: 2 through 4 digits
KX-TD816 – Jack 01-1 through 16-1 = 201 through 216
Jack 01-2 through 16-2 = 301 through 316
KX-TD1232 – Jack 01-1 through 64-1 = 201 through 264;
Jack 01-2 through 64-2 = 301 through 364
1.
Enter 003.
Display: EXT Number Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack No?–>
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display: #01-1:EXT201
4.
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of 32 extension numbers for KX-TD816 and 128 extension numbers for KX-TD1232. Each extension number can be two, three, or four digits, consisting of 0 through 9. The and # keys cannot be used.
• In case of KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master
System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
System Programming 4-19
003 4.2
Manager Programming
Extension Number Set
(contd.)
• An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits disagree with the setting of the program [100] “Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks.” If one digit is assigned as the leading digit, some extensions have two digits and some have three digits. If two digits are assigned, some have three digits and some have four digits.
• Two extension numbers can be assigned per jack. If XDP is disabled for the jack in program [600] “EXtra Device Port,” the extension number of the second part (XX-2) is not available. (XX=jack number)
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
• Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment of programs [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set”, [127] “ Voice Mail
Extension Number Assignment” and [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.” Valid entry examples: 10 and 11; 10 and 110. Invalid entry examples: 10 and 106; 210 and 21.
• Program [004] “Extension Name Set” is used to give names to extension numbers.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
Intercom Calling
Special Features for KX-T7235 — Extension Dialing
4-20 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
Extension Name Set
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
004
Assigns names to the extension numbers programmed in program
[003] “Extension Number Set.”
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16 (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64 (-1 / -2)
(-1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Name: 10 characters (max.)
All jacks – Not stored
1.
Enter 004.
Display: EXT Name set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display: #01-1:Not Stored
4.
Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of 32 names for KX-TD816 and 128 names for
KX-TD1232. Each name has a maximum of 10 characters.
• Program [003] “Extension Number Set” is used to assign extension numbers.
System Programming 4-21
004 4.2
Manager Programming
Extension Name Set
(contd.)
• In case of KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master
System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Intercom Calling
Special Features for KX-T7235 — Extension Dialing
4-22 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
Flexible CO Button Assignment
Description
Selection
Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on proprietary telephones from a centralized telephone.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64
• Button Code (plus parameter, if required):
Button Code Parameter
0 (Single-CO)
1 (DSS)
2 (One-Touch)
3 (Message Waiting)
4 (FWD/DND)
5 (Save)
6 (Account)
KX-TD816: 01 through 08 (CO line number)
KX-TD1232: 01 through 24 (CO line number)
2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
16 digits max. (Telephone number)
None
None
None
None
7 (Conference)
80 (Log-In/Log-Out)
None
None
81 (Hurry-Up)
82 (Voice Mail Transfer)
83 (Two-Way Record)
†
84 (Two-Way Transfer)
†
85 (Live Call Screening)
†
86 (Live Call Screening Cancel)
†
2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
None
None
87 (Alert)
9 (Terminate)
(Loop-CO)
# (Group-CO)
CO (ringer frequency)
None
None
None
1 through 8 (CO line group number)
1 through 8 (ring tone type number)
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming 4-23
005
Default
Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
Flexible CO Button Assignment
(contd.)
KX-TD816
For KX-T7230
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 =Single-CO 01 through 08;
Ring tone type 2
9 through 24 = Not stored.
For KX-T7235
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 =Single-CO 01 through 08;
Ring tone type 2
9 through 12 = Not stored.
ForKX-T7250
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 6=Single-CO 01 through 06;
Ring tone type 2
KX-TD1232
For KX-T7230
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 24 =Single-CO 01 through 24;
Ring tone type 2
For KX-T7235
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 12 =Single-CO 01 through 12;
Ring tone type 2
ForKX-T7250
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 6=Single-CO 01 through 06;
Ring tone type 2
1.
Enter 005.
Display: Flexible key Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display: PT-PGM Mode
4.
Press a CO button to be changed.
The display shows the contents pre-assigned to the button.
Display example: CO-01
5.
Enter a button code (plus parameter, if required).
To change the parameter, press CLEAR and the new parameter.
6.
Press STORE.
4-24 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
Flexible CO Button Assignment
(contd.)
005
7.
• To program another CO button of the same jack, repeat steps 4 through 6.
• To program another jack, press SELECT and repeat steps 3 through 6.
8.
Press END.
1.
Perform the same procedures as steps 1 through 4 above.
Cancelling
2.
Enter 2.
3.
Press STORE.
4.
Press END.
Conditions • A centralized telephone is a telephone connected to jack 01 or a jack programmed as a manager extension in program [006] “Operator /
Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night.”
• In case of the KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• If you press the same CO button again at step 5, you can select a desired ringer frequency for the CO button from eight types of ring tone. When you enter the tone type number (1 through 8), you will hear the selected tone type until STORE is pressed. This selection is possible only for the CO buttons that have been assigned to Single-CO, Group-CO, or
Loop-CO.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Button, Flexible Buttons on Proprietary Telephones
System Programming 4-25
006 4.2
Manager Programming
Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
Description Assigns the jack number for a manager and / or operators. The manager extension can perform System Programming. An operator has the ability to perform operator services.
Selection • OP-1 (operator 1) (Day / Night) / OP-2 (operator 2) (Day /
Night)/ MNGER (manager)
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64
Default Operator 1 (Day / Night) – Port 01
Operator 2 – Not stored
Manager – Not stored
Programming 1.
Enter 006.
Display: Operator/Manager
2.
Press NEXT to program Operator 1 in Day mode.
Display: OP-1– Day:Jack01
To program another item, you can also keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired one is displayed.
3.
Enter a jack number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new jack number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
To program another item, press NEXT or PREV.
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5.
7.
Press END.
Conditions • Up to two operators and a manager can be programmed.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• The manager cannot be assigned the jack number of the DSS Console
Port set in program [007] “DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone
Assignment.”
• If the assigned jack is in eXtra Device Port mode, the proprietary telephone jack is treated as the manager / operator extension.
• If there is no operator or manager, press CLEAR at step 3.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Manager Extension Operator
4-26 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming 007
DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the jack numbers for the DSS Console and the paired extension.
• DSS Console number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 04
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 08 (for Master),
09 through 16 (for Slave)
• Jack number for DSS Console: KX-TD816 – 02 through 16
KX-TD1232 – 02 through32 (for
Master),
33 through 64 (for
Slave)
• Jack number for paired extension: KX-TD816 – 01through 16
KX-TD1232 – 01 through32
(for Master),
33 through 64
(for Slave)
All DSS Consoles – Not stored
1.
Enter 007.
Display: DSS Console Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: DSS NO?–>
3.
Enter a DSS Console number.
To enter DSS Console number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: DSS-01:# P:#
4.
Enter a jack number for the console.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new jack number.
5.
Press
→
.
6.
Enter a jack number for the paired extension.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new jack number.
Display example: DSS-01:#02 P:#03
7.
Press STORE.
System Programming 4-27
007 4.2
Manager Programming
DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
(contd.)
8.
To program another DSS Console, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired DSS Console number.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8.
Conditions
10.
Press END.
• The jack number for the Console and that for the paired extension must be entered together.
• Multiple DSS Consoles cannot be assigned to the same DSS Console jack.
• Multiple DSS Consoles can be paired with the same proprietary telephone jack.
• A DSS Console jack cannot be assigned the jack 01 and the jack number of Manager set in program [006] “Operator / Manager
Extension Assignment — Day/Night.”
• If all incoming outside calls are set to ring at the operator extension telephone in program [407]–[408] “DIL 1:1 Extension — Day /
Night,” assigning the DSS Consoles to the operator extension makes the operator’s job much easier.
• If a DSS Console - assigned jack is programmed for eXtra Device Port, an SLT can be connected to the jack in parallel with the console.
• If an SLT is assigned as the pair extension, the paired DSS Console will not function.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
DSS Console (KX-T7240)
4-28 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
Absent Messages
008
Description
Selection
Default
Used to program the absent messages. An absent message, if set by the extension user, is displayed on the calling extension’s telephone to show the reason for the user’s absence.
• Message number: 1 through 9
• Message: 16 characters (max.)
1: Will Return Soon
2: Gone Home
3: At EXT %%%
4: Back at %%:%%
5: Out Until %%/%%
6: In a Meeting
7 through 9: Blank (not stored)
Programming
Conditions
1.
Enter 008.
Display: Message Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: MSG NO?–>
3.
Enter a message number.
To enter message number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: MSG1:Will Return
4.
Enter the message.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new message.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another message, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired message number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of nine messages. Messages 1 through 6 are programmed at the factory but can be changed. Each message has a maximum of 16 characters.
• You can enter a maximum of seven “%” characters per message which can be programmed at each user’s station. The station user can enter 0 than the number of “%” characters, it is recommended to fill the remaining “%” characters with “#” or “ .”
• If there are 4-digit extension numbers available in your system, add one
“%” to Message 3.
• To display parts of the message which have scrolled off the display, press
→ or
←
.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Absent Message Capability
System Programming 4-29
009 4.2
Manager Programming
Emergency Dial Number Set
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns emergency call numbers.
• Emergency dial number: 1 through 8
• Telephone number: 16 digits (max.)
Dial number 1 : 0117
Dial number 2 : 0118
Dial number 3 : 0144
Dial number 4-8 : Not stored
1.
Enter 009.
Display: Emergency Dial
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Emergency NO?–>
3.
Enter an emergency dial number.
To enter emergency number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 1:0110
4.
Enter a telephone number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another emergency dial number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired emergency dial
number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
Conditions
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of eight emergency call numbers. Each number has a maximum of 16 digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
• No restriction is applied to emergency call numbers.
• For outside calls, enter a line access code (0, 81 through 88) before the phone number.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Emergency Call
4-30 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
Budget Management
010
Description
Selection
Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the extension basis.
• Jack number : KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (–1 / –2)
( =all jacks, –1= first part, –2= second part)
• Charge limitation (Charge): 0 through 9999
Default
Programming
All jacks – 0
1.
Enter 010.
Display: Charge Limit
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01–1: 0FR
4.
Enter a charge limitation.
To delete the charge limitation, press CLEAR.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • If the charge limitation is set “0,” no restriction is applied.
• To assign all jack number to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack01.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by [125]
Assignment of Denomination.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Budget Management
Charge Fee Reference
System Programming 4-31
011 4.2
Manager Programming
Charge Margin and Tax Rate
Description
Selection
Assigns the margin rate of a telephone charge and the tax rate to the total charge. This program is used for printing out the total charge when a guest checks out.
Margin (%): 0 through 999
Tax (%): 0 through 99
Default
Programming
Margin : 0%, Tax : 0%
1.
Enter 011.
Display: Charge Margin
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Marg,Tax: 0, 0%
3.
Enter a charge margin rate.
To delete the charge limitation, press CLEAR.
4.
Press
→.
5.
Enter a tax rate.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
Press END.
Conditions None
Feature References Section 3, Features,
HOTEL APPLICATION – Check-In / Check-Out
4-32 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
ISDN Extension Number Set
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
012
Assigns an extension number to each port which is connected to the
ISDN S0 unit or card.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12
• Extension Number: 1 through 3 digits
All ports – Not stored
1.
Enter 012.
Display: ISDN EXT.Num Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display: #03:Not Stored
4.
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• Each extension number can be one, two or three digits, consisting of 0
through 9. The and # keys cannot be used.
• A multiple subscriber number (MSN) is determined regarding to this assignment. The MSN consists of the assigned extension number and an additional digit, 0 through 9.
Example) In case that the ISDN extension number is assigned “3”;
30 through 39 are effective as MSN's. The extension user can call any terminal equipment on the ISDN S0 bus with MSN individually.
Pressing “30” calls all extensions on the ISDN S0 bus simultaneously.
System Programming 4-33
012 4.2
Manager Programming
ISDN Extension Number Set
(contd.)
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits disagree with the setting of the program [100] “Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks.” If one digit is assigned as the leading digit, some extensions have two digits and some have three digits. If two digits are assigned, some have three digits and some have four digits.
• Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment of program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.” Valid entry examples: 10 and 11; 10 and 110. Invalid entry examples: 10 and 106;
210 and 21.
• Program [013] “ISDN Extension Name Set” is used to give names to the extension numbers.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
4-34 System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
ISDN Extension Name Set
013
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns names to the ISDN extension numbers programmed in program [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set.”
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12
• Name: 10 characters (max.)
All ports – Not stored
1.
Enter 013.
Display: ISDN EXT. Name
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display: #03:Not Stored
4.
Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming 4-35
014 4.2
Manager Programming
Budget Management on ISDN Port
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the ISDN port basis.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Charge limitation (Charge): 0 through 9999
All ports – 0
1.
Enter 014.
Display: ISDN Charge Lim.
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03: 0 FR
4.
Enter a charge limitation.
To delete the charge limitation, press CLEAR.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • If the charge limitation is set “0,” no restriction is applied.
• To assign all port to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by [125]
Assignment of Denomination.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Budget management
ISDN Extension
Charge Fee Reference
4-36 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
Flexible Numbering
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
100
Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature numbers for system features.
• Selection number: 01 through 77 (except 38) (See “Feature
Number List” on pages 4-38 and 4-39 for the corresponding features.)
• Feature number: 1 or 2 digits (for selection numbers 01 through
16);
1 through 3 digits (for selection numbers 17 through 77)
See “Feature Number List” on pages 4-38 and 4-39.
1.
Enter 100.
Display: FLX Numbering
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Select NO?–>
3.
Enter a selection number.
To enter selection number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01. 1-EXT BL:2
4.
Enter the feature number.
To delete the feature number, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another selection, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired selection number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers
(01) through (16) 1st through 16th extension blocks;
1.
Enter 100.
2.
Press NEXT.
System Programming 4-37
100
Conditions
4.3
System Programming
Flexible Numbering
(contd.)
3.
Enter 00.
Display: All Feature CLR?
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of 16 extension blocks and 59 feature numbers.
• Each extension block has one or two digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
Assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective blocks.
• Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programs [003]
“Extension Number Set” and [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• To clear an extension block (01) through (16), it is required to change the corresponding numbers assigned in program [003] “Extension
Number Set” and program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• Each feature number has one through three digits, consisting of 0 cannot access the feature.
• Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid. Valid entry example: 30 and 31, 210 and 211. Invalid entry example: 5 and 5, 30 and 301.
• If you delete a feature number, the feature cannot be used by dialing operation.
• You can remove all the feature numbers except selections (01) through
(16).
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Flexible Numbering
Flexible Feature Numbers
Number
01
02
03 - 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Feature
1st hundred extension block
2nd hundred extension block
3rd through 16th hundred extension block
Operator call
Automatic line access
CO line group line access
System speed dialing
Station speed dialing
Station speed dialing programming
Doorphone call
Paging – external
Paging – external answer / TAFAS answer
4-38 System Programming
Default
2
3
None
9
0
8
6
60
68
64
44
4.3
System Programming
Flexible Numbering
(contd.)
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
49
50
51
52
44
45
46
47
48
40
41
42
43
34
35
36
37
39
Number
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
60
61
62
63
64-68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76 †
77
Feature
Paging – group
Paging – group answer
Call pickup, CO line
Call pickup, group
Call pickup, directed
Call hold
Hold retrieve – intercom
Hold retrieve – CO line
Last number redial
Call park / call park retrieve
Account code entry
Door opener
Station feature clear
Message waiting
External relay on
Call forwarding / do not disturb
Call pickup deny
External ringer
Call waiting
Executive busy override deny
Pickup dialing program
Absent message
Timed reminder
Electronic station lockout
Night service mode
Parallel telephone mode
Background music – external
Paging – deny
Primary COS select
Secondary COS select
UCD log-in / log-out
Operator 1 call
Operator 2 call
Automatic callback busy cancel
Emergency call 1
Emergency call 2
Emergency call 3
Emergency call 4 through 8
External ringer answer
Timed reminder remote
Call log, incoming
Do not disturb for DDI
CLIR
COLR
Call log lock control, incoming
Live Call Screening Password †
System working report printout / clear
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming
65
721
791
793
45
61
62
76
77
78
69
730
731
733
74
750
#
52
49
55
790
70
67
710
720
Default
63
4
43
40
41
50
51
53
46
117
118
144
None
7
47
54
56
57
58
59
799
794
4-39
101
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
4.3
System Programming
Language Assignment
Assigns the language displayed on proprietary telephones.
GERMAN/FRENCH/ENGLISH
GERMAN
1.
Enter 101.
Display: Language
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: German
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions None
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Multilingual
4-40 System Programming
102
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
4.3
System Programming
Day / Night Service Starting Time
Sets the starting time on a day of the week basis, when automatic day / night switching is selected.
• Day of the week selection number:
1 (Sunday) / 2 (Monday) / 3 (Tuesday) / 4 (Wednesday) /
5 (Thursday) / 6 (Friday) / 7 (Saturday) / (every day of the week)
• Hour: 0 through 23 / Disable (no switching)
• Minute: 0 through 59
Every day of the week – Day – 9:00 / Night – 17:00
1.
Enter 102.
Display: Day/Night Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Day of Week?–>
3.
Enter the day of the week selection number.
To select Sunday, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: Sun-Day: 9:00
To select night mode, press NEXT one more time.
Display example: Sun-Night: 17:00
4.
Enter the hour.
To set no switching, keep pressing SELECT until “Disable” is displayed and go to step 7.
If SELECT is pressed, the display shows the previous entry. If the previous setting was “Disable,” press SELECT to enter the starting time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
5.
Press
→
.
6.
Enter the minute.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new minutes.
7.
Press STORE.
System Programming 4-41
4.3
System Programming
Day / Night Service Starting Time
(contd.)
102
8.
To program another day / night mode or day of the week, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and the day of the
week selection number.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 10.
Conditions
10.
Press END.
• To select the desired day, you may keep pressing NEXT at step 3. To assign every day of the week to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Sunday.
• If day / night switching is unwanted, select “Disable ” at step 4.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Night Service
4-42 System Programming
103 4.3
System Programming
Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
Description
Selection
Assigns the sequence in which CO line groups will be accessed when in Automatic Line Access mode. When a user dials the feature number for automatic line access (default=0) or presses the
L-CO button, an idle line is hunted in the programmed CO line group order.
CO line group number: 1 through 8, eight entries (max.) in desired order
Default
Programming
12345678
1.
Enter 103.
Display: Local Access
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Access:12345678
3.
Enter the CO line group numbers in priority from top to bottom.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new order.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions There is a maximum of eight CO line groups. Up to eight CO line group numbers can be entered.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Line Access, Automatic
Line Access, Direct
Line Preference – Outgoing
System Programming 4-43
4.3
System Programming
Account Codes
105
Description
Selection
Assigns the account codes for Account Code Entry, Verified – All
Calls and Verified – Toll Restriction Override modes. If Verified –
All Calls is assigned in program [508] “Account Code Entry Mode,” an account code is required to make an outside call. If Verified – Toll
Restriction Override is assigned, an account code is only required for a toll call and overrides toll restriction.
• Location number: 01 through 40
• Account code: 5 digits (max.)
Default
Programming
All locations – Not stored
1.
Enter 105.
Display: Account Code
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?–>
3.
Enter a location number.
To enter location number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01:Not Stored
4.
Enter an account code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new account code.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired location number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 40 verifiable account codes. Each code has a maximum of 5 digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
• Program [508] “Account Code Entry Mode” is used to select the Account
Code Entry mode.
• Account codes having “99” in any part or ending with “9” are invalid, as
“99” is used as a delimiter when entering an account code.
• The location 01 of the entries is used as the account code for Private Call.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Account Code Entry Private Call
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
4-44 System Programming
106 4.3
System Programming
Station Hunting Type
Description
Selection
Used to enable or disable hunting and set the Station Hunting type for each extension group. There are five Station Hunting types available:
Circular, Termination, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), Voice Mail
(VM), and Automated Attendant (AA). If circular hunting is assigned for a group, all the extensions in the group are hunted until an idle one is found. If termination hunting is assigned, hunting stops at the extension which has the largest jack number in the group. If VM hunting is assigned, all the VM ports of an extension group are hunted until an idle one is found to permit Voice Mail Service. If AA hunting is assigned, all the AA ports of an extension group are hunted until an idle one is found to permit AA Service. If UCD is assigned, group members are hunted in circular way, starting at the extension following the last one called.
• Extension group number: 1 through 8, ( =all extension groups)
• Disable (no hunting) / Terminate / Circular / UCD / VM / AA
All extension groups – Disable Default
Programming 1.
Enter 106.
Display: Call Hunting
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: EXT GRP NO?–>
3.
Enter an extension group number.
To enter extension group number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: Group1:Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another extension group, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired extension group number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Program [602] “Extension Group Assignment” is used to assign the extension group members.
• The system supports a maximum of eight jacks (16 jacks during System
Connection*) for connection to a Voice Processing System as Voice Mail or
Auto-Abfr ports.
• To assign all extension groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Group1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Station Hunting
Voice Mail Integration
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
4-45 System Programming * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
4.3
System Programming
System Password
107
Description Assigns the password required for entering System Programming mode and for maintenance from a personal computer.
Password: 4 through 7 digits Selection
Default
Programming
1234
1.
Enter 107.
Display: System Password
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Password:1234
3.
Enter a password.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new password.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• The password can be from four to seven digits long. The valid numbers are from 0 through 9.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer
System Programming with Proprietary Telephone
4-46 System Programming
108 4.3
System Programming
One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Enables or disables the function of automatically holding the outside call when a DSS button on the DSS Console or proprietary telephone is pressed.
Enable/Disable
Enable
1.
Enter 108.
Display: DSS Auto Hold
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Auto HLD:Enable
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions None
Feature References Section 3, Features,
One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
System Programming 4-47
109
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
4.3
System Programming
Expansion Card /Unit Type
Assigns the type of expansion cards/units to be used in the Master and Slave Systems. This allows the system to identify the card and/or unit in each expansion location.
KX-TD816
• Master
• Areas 1; 2 = 1;2 (Expansion Area) :
S (2S0) / E1 (EXT1)
KX-TD1232
• Master / Slave
• Areas 1; 2; 3 =1;2;3 (Expansion Area) :
S (2S0) / E1 (EXT1) / E2 (EXT2)
KX-TD816 – S; N1
KX-TD1232 – Master and Slave – S; E1; E2
1.
Enter 109.
Display: Expansion Card
2.
Press NEXT to program Master System.
To program “Slave,” press NEXT twice.
Display example: Mast.: S; E1; E2
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press
→
.
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the all the required entries are completed.
7.
Press STORE.
If only one system is in operation, go to step 8.
8.
Press NEXT to program Slave System.
Display example: Slav.: S; E1; E2
9.
Repeat steps 3 through 7.
4-48 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
Expansion Card /Unit Type
(contd.)
109
10.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of starting the system for the first time or System Data Clear, the application for location will adapt the practical installation instead of system default setting.
• There are two expansion areas on the KX-TD816, areas 1 and 2 from bottom to top. There are three expansion area on the KX-TD1232, area
1, 2 and 3 from bottom to top.
• If the Slave System is out-of-service or in case of KX-TD816, skip the steps 8 and 9.
• After changing the setting, to make your setting effective, unplug the system once and plug it in again. Otherwise the previous setting will be maintained.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Module Expansion
System Programming 4-49
110 4.3
System Programming
Network Type Assignment
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the type of ISDN network.
· EURO/NET2/NET3
NET2
1.
Enter 110.
Display: Network Type
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: NET2
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions None
Feature References None
4-50 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
DDI Removed Digit /Added Number Assignment
111
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
Assigns the removed digits and added number to a subscriber's number and the DDI number sent from the network to make the extension which receives a call.
· Removed digit:
· Added number:
0 through 16 (0=no deleting)
4 digits (max.)
Removed digit — 0; Added number — not stored
1.
Enter 111.
Display: DDI Remove/Add
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: RMV/ADD: 0,
3.
Enter the digit(s) to be deleted.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
4.
Press
→.
Display example: RMV/ADD: 3,
5.
Enter the number(s) to be added.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
Press END.
Example:
If the removed digits are assigned “6” and the added number is assigned
“ 2”, the number sent from the network is changed as follows:
85492603 (DDI number :2 digits)
Six digits are deleted and “2” is added, and the number becomes “203”.
Feature References Section 3, Features
Direct Dialing In (DDI)
System Programming 4-51
112 4.3
System Programming
DDI Number for Operator Assignment
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the DDI number for an operator.
· DDI number: 4 digits (max.)
0
1.
Enter 112.
Display: Operator DDI No.
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: DDI Number: 0
3.
Enter the DDI number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions · You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References Section 3, Features
Direct Dialing In (DDI)
4-52 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
VM Status DTMF Set
Description
Selection
Default
113
Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing
System (VPS) to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly.
The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF signals:
RBT (ringback tone) : This signal is sent when calling an extension.
BT (busy tone) : This is sent when the called extension is busy.
ROT (reorder tone) :
This is sent when the dialed number is invalid.
DND (DND tone)
Answer
:
This is sent when the other extension has DND assigned.
: This is sent when the other extension answers the call.
Disconnect : This is sent when the other extension hangs up.
Confirm (confirmation tone) :
This is sent when the feature number for “Message Waiting Lamp” is valid.
FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone) :
Not available (reserved).
FWD VM BT(FWD to VM busy tone) :
This is sent when the called extension has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone) :
Not available (reserved).
• RBT / BT / ROT / DND / Answer / Disconnect / Confirm /
FWD VM RBT/ FWD VM BT / FWD EXT RBT
• DTMF signal number: 3 digits (max.)
RBT – 1; BT – 2; ROT – 3; DND – 4; Answer – 5; Disconnect –
#9; Confirm – 9; FWD VM RBT – 6; FWD VM BT – 7; FWD
EXT RBT– 8
Programming 1.
Enter 113.
System Programming 4-53
113 4.3
System Programming
VM Status DTMF Set
(contd.)
Display: Voicemail Status
2.
Press NEXT to program ringback tone status.
To program another status, keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired status is displayed.
Display example: RBT :1
3.
Enter a DTMF signal number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
To program another selection, keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5.
7.
Press END.
Conditions • A DTMF signal number can have a maximum of three digits, consisting of 0 through 9, , # and PAUSE.
• The DTMF signals are sent to the extensions in the extension group that is assigned as “VM” or “AA” in program [106] “Station Hunting Type.”
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration
4-54 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
VM Command DTMF Set
Description
114
Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice
Processing System (VPS). There are four commands available:
Leave Message; Get Message; Automated Attendant Service; Voice
Mail Service. These commands are used in the following ways:
(A) If your VPS is used for Voice Mail (VM) Service
(1) Call Forwarding / Intercept Routing to Voice Mail
If a call is forwarded to the VPS, your system will send a mailbox number to the VM port. This allows the caller to leave a message without knowing the mailbox number.
• Required entries (selections):
LV-MSG (Leave Message): This command is transmitted to a
VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port.
AA-SVC (Automated Attendant Service): If AA Service is set to
“Start” in program [990], field (10), the “AA-SVC” command is sent to a VM port if an incoming outside call is answered by the
VM port.
• Other programming required (program addresses): [106]; [602];
[609]; [990], field (10); [990], field (18)
(2) Hearing the message at the extension
If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button indicator of the concerned telephone, the telephone user can hear the message by pressing the MESSAGE button.
• Required entries (selections):
GETMSG (Get Message): This command is transmitted to a VM port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button.
VM-SVC (Voice Mail Service): The “VM-SVC” command is a code transmitted preceding the “GETMSG” command above.
This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the
MESSAGE indicator.
• Other programming required (program addresses): [609]; [990], field (18)
(B) If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant (AA) Service
An AA port answers an incoming outside call to provide AA services, such as call transfer, receiving a message.
• Required entries (selections):
VM-SVC (Voice Mail Service): The “VM-SVC” command is a code transmitted before “LV-MSG” code if Operator transfers a call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily.
• Other programming required (program addresses): [106], [602]
System Programming 4-55
114 4.3
System Programming
VM Command DTMF Set
(contd.)
Selection • LV-MSG/ GETMSG/ AA-SVC / VM-SVC
• DTMF signal number: 16 digits (max.)
Default LV-MSG – H; GETMSG – H; AA-SVC– #8 ; VM-SVC – #6
Programming 1.
Enter 114.
Display: VM Command Set
2.
Press NEXT to program the Nachr. command.
To program another command, keep pressing NEXT until the desired command is displayed.
Display example: LV-MSG:H
3.
Enter a DTMF signal number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
To program another selection, keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5.
7.
Press END.
Conditions • A command signal number can have a maximum of 16 digits, consisting of 0 through 9, , #, FLASH and PAUSE.
• The FLASH button is available only for LV-MSG and GETMSG commands to store “H” which means “Home Position.”
• If “H” is stored for “Nachr.,” a mailbox number programmed in program [609] “Voice Mail Access Codes” or an extension number will be sent to the VM port (Follow On ID function). If certain codes are required before and after the ID code, insert “H” between the codes, as
“aaaHbbb.” If nothing is stored, it will operate as “H.”
• If “ H” is stored for “Hol.N.,” a mailbox number programmed in program [609] “Voice Mail Access Codes” or an extension number will be sent to the port succeeding the “ .”
• To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display, press
→ or
←
.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration
4-56 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
Adjust Time*
115
Description Used to synchronize the time between the Master and the Slave
Systems. Every day at the programmed time, system clock and data adjustment are performed between the two systems, if available.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Hour: 0 through 23
• Minute: 00 through 59
1:00
1.
Enter 115.
Display: Adjust Time
2.
Press NEXT to program hour.
Display example: 1:00
3.
Enter the hour.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new hour.
4.
Press
→ to program minute.
5.
Enter the Minute.
To change the current entry, enter the new minute.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
Press END.
Conditions You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
System Connection
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
System Programming 4-57
116
Description
4.3
System Programming
ROM Version Display
Confirms the version of the ROM of the system.
Display example: P061A50101A
Version Date
Selection
Default
Programming
System Number: KX-TD816 – 0
KX-TD1232 – 0 (Master) / 1 (Slave)
Not applicable.
1.
Enter 116.
Display: ROM Version
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: System NO?->
3.
Enter the System Number.
The display shows the ROM version of the specified system.
4.
To confirm the other system, press SELECT and enter the
System Number.
The display shows the ROM version of the specified system.
5.
Press END.
Conditions • The out-of-service system number is unacceptable.
• In case of the KX-TD816, skip the step 4.
Feature References None
4-58 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
Charge Display Selection
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the initial display format of charge fee.
Meter / in FR
Meter
1.
Enter 117.
Display: Charge Meter
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Meter
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions None
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Charge Fee Reference
Display, Call Information
117
System Programming 4-59
118
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
Feature Reference
4.3
System Programming
Charge Verification Assignment
Assigns the extension which is allowed to refer or clear for the call information on the extension, CO line, department code, account code, and the total.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64,
( =all jack number)
• Enable / Disable
All jacks - Enable
1.
Enter 118.
Display: Charge Refer EXT
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO? ->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01:Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Press END.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the slave, if available, jack numbers in the out-out-service system are unacceptable.
• To assign all jack numbers to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack01.
Section 3, Features,
Charge Fee Reference
4-60 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
Charge Verification ID Code Set
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
Feature Reference
Assigns an ID code required to refer the charge information.
4 digits (0000 through 9999)
1234
1.
Enter 119.
Display: Charge ID Code
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Code: 1234
3.
Enter an ID code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
None
Section 3, Features,
Charge Fee Reference
119
System Programming 4-61
120
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
Feature Reference
4.3
System Programming
Operator Queue
Assigns the limited number of queue and the number of Hurry-Up.
• Queue: 0 through 8
• Number of Hurry-Up : 0 through 7
Queue : 8, H-UP : 4
1.
Enter 120.
Display: Operator Queue
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Queue:8, H-UP: 4
3.
Enter a queue.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
4.
Press
→
.
5.
Enter a number of Hurry-Up.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
Press END.
The queue should be longer than the number of Hurry-Up.
Section 3, Features,
Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer
4-62 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
Pulse Dial Reception Assignment
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
Feature Reference
121
Assigns whether the pulse dial from the extension can be received or not by the system.
Puls : Enable / Puls : Disable
Puls : Enable
1.
Enter 121.
Display: Ext Pulse Dial
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Ext Puls:Enable
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
None
Section 3, Features,
Mixed Station Capacities
System Programming 4-63
122
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
Feature Reference
4.3
System Programming
Automatic Door Open Assignment
Assigns whether the door is automatically unlocked or not, when pressing Call button.
• KX-TD816 – T1 – Day / T1 – Night
KX-TD1232 – T1 – Day / T1 – Night / T2 – Day / T2 – Night
(T1: Doorphone 1, T2: Doorphone 2)
• Enable/Disable
All selections: Not stored.
1.
Enter 122.
Display: Auto. Door Open
2.
Press NEXT to program D1–Day.
To program another status, keep pressing NEXT until the desired one is displayed.
Display example: D1-Day: Disable
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
To program another selection press NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 3 and 4.
7.
Press END.
This programming is applied to the doorphone which provides the door opener.
Section 3, Features,
Door Opener
4-64 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
Hotel Application
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
Feature Reference
123
Assigns whether the hotel application is enabled or disabled.
Disable/Enable
Disable
1.
Enter 123.
Display: Hotel Apply Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Hotel : Disable
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
If “Enable” is selected, the menu “Hotel” is displayed on the operator extension’s KX-T7235 and “Check–In / Check–Out” feature is available.
Section 3, Features,
HOTEL APPLICATION
System Programming 4-65
125
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
4.3
System Programming
Assignment of Denomination
Assigns the Denomination required for your country.
2 characters (Max.)
FR
1.
Enter 125.
Display: Denomination
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: denomi.: FR
3.
Enter a denomination.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new denomination.
To enter characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions • If more than two digits are entered, they are ignored.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Display, Call Information
4-66 System Programming
4.3
System Programming
Voice Mail Number Assignment
†
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the jack number corresponding to voice mail port for data transmission to the Voice Processing System.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 02 through 16
KX-TD1232 – 02 through 64
All jacks—Not Stored
1.
Enter 126.
Display: VMS Port Asn
2.
Press NEXT to program Master System.
To program “Slave”, press NEXT again.
Display: Master: # # #
Conditions
3.
Enter a jack number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new denomination.
4.
Press
→ to enter the other jack number.
5.
Enter a jack number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new jack number.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the other jack number.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
Press NEXT to program Slave System.
Display: Slave: # # #
9.
Repeat steps 3 through 7 to enter jack number.
10.
Press END.
• A maximum of three jacks can be assigned per system.
• Neither the Jack number 01 nor manager extension can be assigned as the jack of voice mail port. The jack of voice mail port cannot be assigned to manager extension.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming 4-67
4.3
System Programming
Voice Mail Number Assignment
† (contd.)
• The jack numbers correspond to the voice mail port in numerical order.
Example: Stored jack numbers: Jacks 02, 03, 05
Jack 02=Voice mail numbers 01, 02; Jack 03=Voice mail numbers 03,
04; Jack 05=Voice mail numbers 05, 06
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 02 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones
4-68 System Programming †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
4.3
System Programming
Voice Mail Number Assignment
†
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
Assigns the extension number for voice mail number. These numbers can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
· Voice mail number: 01 through 12
· Extension Number: 2 through 4 digits
VM-01=265, VM-02=266, VM-03=267, VM-04=268,
VM-05=269,VM-06=270, VM-07=271, VM-08=272,
VM-09=273, VM-10=274, VM-11=275, VM-12=276
1.
Enter 127.
Display: VM EXT No. Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: VM NO?
→
3.
Enter a voice mail number.
To enter voice mail number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display: VM-01:#02-1:265
4.
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
• Double entry and incompatible entry for the extension numbers are invalid.
• The display shows “VM-XX:#YY-1:ZZZ” at step 3.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming 4-69
4.3
System Programming
Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment
† (contd.)
Feature References
“XX” means a voice mail number.
“YY” means the jack number of the voice mail port programmed in
[126].
“-1” of YY-1 means the first part of jack number in digital line.
YY-2 means the second number of the jack number in digital line.
Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones
4-70 System Programming †: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
4.3
System Programming
Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment
†
Description
Selection
Assigns each voice mail number to a voice mail extension group number.
• Voice mail number(VM): 01 through 12,
( = all voice mail numbers)
• Voice mail extension group number (EXG) = 1 through 8
Default
Programming
All voice mail numbers = EXG 1
1.
Enter 128.
Display: VM EXT Group Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: VM NO?
→
3.
Enter a voice mail number.
To enter voice mail number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: VM-01:#02-1:EXG1
4.
Enter the voice mail extension group number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
Press STORE.
5.
6.
To program another voice mail number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and desired voice processing mail number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Display shows “VM-XX:#YY-1:EXG Z” at step 3.
“XX” means a voice mail number.
“YY” means the jack number of the voice mail port programmed in
[126].
“-1” of YY-1 means the first part of jack number in digital line.
“YY-2” means the second part of the jack number in digital line.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming 4-71
200 4.4
Timer Programming
Hold Recall Time
Description Assigns the length of the hold recall timer. This timer is used to alert an extension that a call has been held for an extended period of time.
Time (seconds): 0 through 240 Selection
Default
Programming
60 s
1.
Enter 200.
Display: Hold Recall Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 60 sec
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions • Select “0” if Hold Recall is not required.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Hold Recall
4-72 System Programming
4.4
Timer Programming
Transfer Recall Time
201
Description Sets the number of rings before the transfer recall occurs. If a transferred call is not answered before the programmed time of rings, the call returns to the original caller or to an operator.
Number of rings: 3 through 48 Selection
Default
Programming
12 rings
1.
Enter 201.
Display: Transfer Recall
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:12 rings
3.
Enter the number of rings.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number of rings.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• One ring is equivalent to five seconds.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension
System Programming 4-73
202 4.4
Timer Programming
Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
Description Sets the number of rings for the Call Forwarding – No Answer feature. If a call is not answered before the programmed number of rings, the call is forwarded to the destination.
Number of rings: 1 through 12 Selection
Default
Programming
3 rings
1.
Enter 202.
Display: No Answer Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 3 rings
3.
Enter the number of rings.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number of rings.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• One ring is equivalent to five seconds.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Call Forwarding – No Answer
4-74 System Programming
4.4
Timer Programming
Intercept Time
203
Description Sets the number of rings for the Intercept Routing – No Answer
(IRNA) feature. If a call is not answered before the programmed number of rings, the call is redirected to the programmed station.
Number of rings: 3 through 48 Selection
Default
Programming
12 rings
1.
Enter 203.
Display: Intercept Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time :12 rings
3.
Enter the number of rings.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number of rings.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions • One ring is equivalent to five seconds.
• Programs [409]–[410] “Intercept Extension — Day / Night” are used to program the destination of Intercept Routing on a CO line group basis in day and night modes.
• If the original extension has set Call Forwarding – No Answer,
Intercept Timer starts after the Call Forwarding.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Intercept Routing
System Programming 4-75
204 4.4
Timer Programming
Pickup Dial Waiting Time
Description Sets the number of seconds for Pickup Dialing. If the telephone user lifts the handset, the programmed party is called when the time expires.
Time (seconds): 0 through 8 Selection
Default
Programming
1 s
1.
Enter 204.
Display: Pickup Dial Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time :1 sec
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, enter the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
This time gives the user an opportunity to dial digits before the automatic dialing process occurs.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Pickup Dialing
4-76 System Programming
4.4
Timer Programming
(Reserved For future use.) First Digit Time
207
Description Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of outside dial tone and the first digit dialed on an outgoing outside call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released.
Time (seconds): 5 through 120 Selection
Default
Programming
10 s
1.
Enter 207.
Display: 1st Digit Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 10 sec
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• This timer is used for toll restriction checking.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction
System Programming 4-77
208 4.4
Timer Programming
Inter Digit Time
Description Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing toll call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer applies until the
Toll Restriction check is completed.
Time (seconds): 5 through 30 Selection
Default
Programming
10 s
1.
Enter 208.
Display: Inter Digit Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 10 sec
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• This timer is used for toll restriction checking.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction
4-78 System Programming
4.4
Timer Programming
Automatic Redial Repeat Times
209
Description Sets the number of times Automatic Redial is tried. Automatic redialing of the last dialed or saved number is done up to the specified number of times.
Number of times: 1 through 12 Selection
Default
Programming
5
1.
Enter 209.
Display: Redial Times
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Attempt:10
3.
Enter the number of times.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number of times.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• Program [210] “Automatic Redial Interval Time” is used to set the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Redial, Automatic
System Programming 4-79
210 4.4
Timer Programming
Automatic Redial Interval Time
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Sets the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts.
Time (seconds): 6 through 120 (
×
10 is the actual time)
6 (60 seconds)
1.
Enter 210.
Display: Interval Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 60 sec
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions • You enter a number from 6 through 120. The actual time is 10 times your input.
• Program [209] “Automatic Redial Repeat Times” is used to set the number of times Automatic Redial is tried.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Redial, Automatic
4-80 System Programming
4.4
Timer Programming
External Relay Connecting Time
213
Description
Selection
Set the connecting time to hold the external relay on.
• Master / Slave*
• Time (seconds) : 0 through 99
Default
Programming
5 sec
1.
Enter 213.
Display: Ext Relay Time
2.
Press NEXT.
To program “Slave,” press NEXT twice.
Display example: Time-1: 5 sec
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, enter the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press NEXT to program Slave System.
Display example: Time-1: 5 sec
6.
Repeat steps 3 and 4.
7.
Press END.
Conditions • If “0” is assigned, the system will hold the external relay on until the controlling telephone is on-hooked.
• If the Slave System is out-of-service or in case of the KX-TD816, skip the steps 5 and 6.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
External Relay
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
System Programming 4-81
214 4.4
Timer Programming
Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
Description Set the interval time of Message Waiting ring for a single line telephone.
Time (minutes) : 0 through 64 Selection
Default
Programming
10 min
1.
Enter 214.
Display: MW Ring Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Interval: 10 min
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions When the internal time is set “0,” the telephone does not ring for Message
Waiting notification.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Message Waiting
4-82 System Programming
4.5
TRS Programming 301-305
T
RS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
Description
Selection
These allow you to specify the numbers which are toll-restricted for each toll restriction level as follows:
Program [301]: restricts levels 2 through 6
Program [302]: restricts levels 3 through 6
Program [303]: restricts levels 4 through 6
Program [304]: restricts levels 5 through 6
Program [305]: restricts level 6
• Location number: 01 through 20
• Toll call number: 7 digits (max.)
Default Location 01 in program [301]:
All other locations – Not stored
Programming 1.
Enter a program address (301 through 305).
Display example: TRS Deny LVL-2
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?–>
3.
Enter a location number.
To enter location number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01:
4.
Enter a toll call number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired location number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of 20 toll call numbers which can be restricted for each program. Each number has a maximum of seven digits, consisting of 0 through 9, and . The character “ ” can be used as a wild card character.
• Programs [306]–[310] “TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through
6” are used to assign exceptions to these numbers. Programs
[500]–[501] “Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night” are used to set the toll restriction value for each COS.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction
System Programming 4-83
306-310 4.5
TRS Programming
TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
Description
Selection
These allow you to assign numbers which are exceptions to the toll restriction specified in programs [301] through [305] as follows:
Program [306]: applies to level 2
Program [307]: applies to levels 2 through 3
Program [308]: applies to levels 2 through 4
Program [309]: applies to levels 2 through 5
Program [310]: applies to levels 2 through 6
• Location number: 01 through 20
• Exceptional number: 7 digits (max.)
Default
Programming
All locations – Not stored
1.
Enter a program address (306 through 310).
Display example: TRS Excp LVL-2
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?->
3.
Enter a location number.
To enter location number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01:Not Stored
4.
Enter an exceptional number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired location number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions There is a maximum of 20 numbers for each program. Each number has a maximum of seven digits, consisting of 0 through 9, and . The character “ ” can be used as a wild card character.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction
4-84 System Programming
400 4.6
CO Line Programming
CO Line Connection Assignment
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Used to identify the CO lines which are connected to the system.
This prevents users from originating a call to a line which is not connected.
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 8,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Connect/No Connect
All CO lines – Connect
1.
Enter 400.
Display: Connection
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Connect
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment
System Programming 4-85
4.6
CO Line Programming
CO Line Group Assignment
401
Description Each CO line must be assigned to a CO line group. This program defines the CO line group assignment for each CO line. For example, if there are multiple telephone service companies available, the CO lines can be grouped by company.
Selection • CO line (CO) number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• CO line group (TRG) number: 1 through 8
Default CO01 – TRG 1; CO05 – TRG 5;
CO02 – TRG 2; CO06 – TRG 6;
CO03 – TRG 3; CO07 – TRG 7;
CO04 – TRG 4; CO08 – TRG 8 (for KX-TD816)
CO08 through CO24 – TRG 8 (for KX-TD1232)
Programming 1.
Enter 401.
Display : Trunk Group Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: TRG1
4.
Enter the CO line group number.
To change the current entry, enter the new CO line group number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one CO line group, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
CO Line Group
4-86 System Programming
407-408 4.6
CO Line Programming
DIL I:1 Extension-Day/Night
Description The Direct In Lines (DIL) 1:1 feature allows incoming outside calls to be directed to a specific extension. When a CO line is assigned as DIL 1:1, it is necessary to assign the destination. These programs specify the extension number for day or night mode.
Selection • CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits / Disable (no DIL 1:1)
Default
Programming
All CO lines – Disable — Day / Night
1.
Enter a program address (407 for day or 408 for night).
Display example: DIL 1: 1 Asn Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Disable
4.
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
To disable DIL 1:1, press CLEAR.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• You set the extension numbers in program [003] “Extension Number
Set” or floating numbers of external ringer, pagers, UCD and the modem in program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• If a CO line is also programmed for DIL 1:N in program [603]–[604]
“DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night,” it is regarded as a DIL 1:1 line.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Direct In Lines (DIL) Night Service
System Programming 4-87
4.6
CO Line Programming
Intercept Extension-Day/Night
409-410
Description Intercept Routing provides an automatic re-direction of calls which cannot or have not been answered. These programs set the destination in both day and night modes for each line group.
Selection • CO line group (TRG) number: 1 through 8,
( =all CO line groups)
• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits / Disable (no Intercept
Routing)
Default
Programming
All CO line groups – Disable — Day / Night
1.
Enter a program address (409 for day or 410 for night).
Display example: TRG Intercept Nig
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?–>
3.
Enter the CO line group number.
To enter CO line group number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: TRG1: Disable
4.
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
To disable Intercept Routing, press CLEAR.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line group, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and the desired CO line group number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • You set the extension numbers in program [003] “Extension Number
Set” or floating numbers of external ringer, UCD and pagers, in program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Intercept Routing
4-88 System Programming
411
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
4.6
CO Line Programming
Host PBX Access Codes
Assigns Host PBX access codes. If the system is installed behind a host PBX, an access code is required to make an outside call. Up to four codes can be stored for a CO line group assigned the line.
• CO line group (TRG) number: 1 through 8,
( =all CO line groups)
• Access code: 1 or 2 digits, four different entries (max.)
All CO line groups – Not stored
1.
Enter 411.
Display : TRG Host PBX NO.
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : TRK GRP NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line group number.
To enter CO line group number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: TRG1: , , ,
4.
Enter an access code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new access code.
Display example: TRG1:01, , ,
5.
To enter more access codes for the same CO line group, press
→ and enter the access codes until all the required entries are completed.
Display example: TRG1:01,08,10,22
6.
Press STORE.
7.
To program another CO line group, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line group number.
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7.
9.
Press END.
System Programming 4-89
4.6
CO Line Programming
Host PBX Access Codes
(contd.)
411
Conditions • This program is only required if a host PBX is connected to the system.
• The access code has one or two digits, consisting of 0 through 9 and
.
• If conflicting access codes (such as 8 and 81) are stored for the same
CO line group, the 1-digit code (8) only will be in effect.
• To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
External Feature Access
Host PBX Access
Pause Insertion, Automatic
4-90 System Programming
418 4.6
CO Line Programming
External Ringer Assignment
Description Selects whether external ringer will ring or not when a call arrives through a CO line.
Selection • CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Disable (no ring) / Enable 1 (Ringer 1) / Enable 2
(Ringer 2)
All CO lines – Disable Default
Programming 1.
Enter 418.
Display: Ringer Assign
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
External Ringer
System Programming 4-91
4.6
CO Line Programming
Subscriber Number Assignment
419
Description Assign the subscriber number which is assigned to a CO line to a central office for Calling Line Identification Presentation or
Connected Line Identification Presentation.
Selection • CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Telephone number: 16 digits (max.)
Default
Programming
All CO lines – Not stored
1. Enter 419.
Display: Telephone Number
2. Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3. Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Not Stored
4.
Enter a telephone number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line number, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • The valid characters are 0 through 9.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, CO 01 through CO 12 are for the Master
System and CO 13 through CO 24 are for the Slave, If available.
• To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display, press
→ or
←
.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
4-92 System Programming
420 4.6
CO Line Programming
Direct Dialing In
Description
Selection
Assign the contract status of the Direct Dialing In (DDI) Service on
CO line basis. This setting is also sued for Calling Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP) and Connected line
Identification Presentation (COLP).
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Disable/Enable
All CO lines – Enable Default
Programming 1.
Enter 420.
Display: ISDN Service Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• If “Enable” is selected, the subscriber number and extension number is provided to ISDN for CLIP and COLP.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Direct Dialing In (DDI)
System Programming 4-93
4.6
CO Line Programming
CO Line Name Assignment
421
Description Assigns names of company or customer to each CO line so that the operator or the extension user can find the destination to which the caller tries to reach, before answering.
Selection • CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
• Name: 10 characters (max.)
All CO lines – Not stored Default
Programming 1.
Enter 421.
Display: CO Line Name
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Not Stored
4.
Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
CO Line Name Display
Display, Call Information
4-94 System Programming
422 4.6
CO Line Programming
ISDN Port Type
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the type of each port either CO line or extension line on
ISDN port basis.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• CO (CO line) / Extension
All ports – CO
1.
Enter 422.
Display: ISDN Line Type
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:CO
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming 4-95
4.6
CO Line Programming
ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
423
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the active mode of Layer 1 on ISDN port basis.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Permanent / Call
All ports – Permanent
1.
Enter 423.
Display: L1 Active Mode
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Permanent
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
4-96 System Programming
424 4.6
CO Line Programming
ISDN Configuration
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the configuration on ISDN port basis.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Point (point to point) / Multipoint (point to multipoint)
All ports – Point
1.
Enter 424.
Display: Access Mode
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Point
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• If one equipment is connected to the ISDN port, select "Point," If multiple equipments are connected, select "Multipoint."
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming 4-97
4.6
CO Line Programming
ISDN Data Link Mode
425
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the data link mode on ISDN port basis.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Permanent / Call
All ports – Permanent
1.
Enter 425.
Display: Data Link Mode
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Permanent
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port number, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
4-98 System Programming
426 4.6
CO Line Programming
ISDN TEI Mode
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns the Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) mode on ISDN port basis.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Fix 0 through 63 / Automatic
All ports – Fix 0
1.
Enter 426.
Display: TEI Assign
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a Port 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01:Fix 0
4.
Enter TEI.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • If the "Point" is selected in program [424] , assign the fixed TEI. If
"Multipoint" is selected, assign "Automatic."
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming 4-99
4.6
CO Line Programming
ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number
427
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Selects whether the Multiple Subscriber Number is allocated to each terminal equipment on ISDN S0 bus or not on ISDN port basis.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Enable / Disable (no number)
All ports – Disable
1.
Enter 427.
Display: MSN Service
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
4-100 System Programming
428 4.6
CO Line Programming
ISDN Extension Progress Tone
Description
Selection
Enables or disables to send the progress tone to ISDN extension on
ISDN port basis.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Enable / Disable (no tone)
Default
Programming
All ports – Disable
1.
Enter 428.
Display: ISDN EXT Tone
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming 4-101
4.7
COS Programming
Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
500-501
Description Each extension must be assigned a Class of Service (COS). These programs set the toll restriction value for each COS in day or night mode.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Level number: 1 through 8
All COS – Level 1 — Day / Night
1.
Enter a program address (500 for day or 501 for night).
Display example: TRS Level Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1:1
4.
Enter a level number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Night Service
Toll Restriction
4-102 System Programming
503 4.7
COS Programming
Call Transfer to CO Line
Description This program determines which Classes of Services (COS) are allowed to perform the Call Transfer to CO Line function.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Enable/Disable
All COS – Enable
1.
Enter 503.
Display: Transfer to CO
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Transfer, Screened – to CO Line
System Programming 4-103
4.7
COS Programming
Call Forwarding to CO Line
504
Description This program determines which Classes of Services (COS) are allowed to perform the Call Forwarding to CO Line function.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Disable/Enable
All COS – Disable.
1.
Enter 504.
Display: Call FWD to CO
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: Bkl1: COS1: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – to CO Line
4-104 System Programming
505 4.7
COS Programming
Executive Busy Override
Description Determines which Classes of Services (COS) are allowed to perform Executive Busy Override – CO Line / Extension.
Executive Busy Override allows the user to intrude into an established call.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Enable/Disable
All COS – Disable
1.
Enter 505.
Display: Busy Override
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Executive Busy Override – CO Line
Executive Busy Override – Extension
System Programming 4-105
4.7
COS Programming
Executive Busy Override Deny
506
Description This program is used to determine which Classes of Services (COS) are allowed to deny Executive Busy Override. Executive Busy
Override Deny allows the user to prevent Executive Busy Override
– CO Line / Extension from being executed by another extension user.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Disable/Enable
All COS – Enable
1.
Enter 506.
Display: Busy Over. Deny
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Executive Busy Override – CO Line
Executive Busy Override – Extension
4-106 System Programming
507 4.7
COS Programming
Do Not Disturb Override
Description This program determines which Classes of Services (COS) are allowed to perform Do Not Disturb (DND) Override.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Disable/Enable
All COS – Disable
1.
Enter 507.
Display: DND Override
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
System Programming 4-107
4.7
COS Programming
Account Code Entry Mode
508
Description There are three account code modes: Option, Verified-All Calls and
Verified-Toll Restriction Override. This program determines the mode to be used by each Class of Service (COS).
Optional mode: The user can enter any account code, if needed.
Verified – All Calls mode:
The user must always enter a pre-assigned account code to make an outside call.
Verified – Toll Restriction Override mode:
The user must enter a pre-assigned account code when the user needs to override toll restriction.
Selection
• Option / Verify-All (Verified-All Calls) / Verify-Toll (Verified-
Toll Restriction Override)
Default
Programming
All COS – Option
1.
Enter 508.
Display: Call Accounting
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Option
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• Program [105] “Account Codes” is used to define the Account Codes for the Verified modes.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Account Code Entry
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
4-108 System Programming
509-510 4.7
COS Programming
Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialing – Day/Night
Description These programs set the toll restriction value used in System Speed
Dialing for each Class of Service (COS) in day or night mode.
When the user makes a call with System Speed Dialing, the system will check the phone number with this level.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Level number: 1 through 8
All COS – Level 1 – Day / Night
1.
Enter a program address (509 for day or 510 for night).
Display: SPD TRS LVL Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1:1
4.
Enter a level number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
System Programming 4-109
4.7
COS Programming
Door Opener Access
511
Description Enables or disables to unlock the door opener by feature number on a Class of Service (COS) basis.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Enable/Disable
All COS – Enable
1.
Enter 511.
Display: Door Opener
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Door Opener
4-110 System Programming
512 4.7
COS Programming
External Relay Access
Description Enables or disables to turn on the external relay on a Class of
Service (COS) basis.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Enable/Disable
All COS – Enable
1.
Enter 512.
Display: External Relay
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
External Relay
System Programming 4-111
4.7
COS Programming
Night Service Access
513
Description Enables or disables to switch the Day/Night service on a Class of
Service (COS) basis.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Enable/Disable
All COS – Enable
1.
Enter 513.
Display: Night Service
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• The operator extension can switch the mode regardless of setting.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Night Service
4-112 System Programming
514 4.7
COS Programming
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
Description Enables or disables to reject Direct Dialing In call on a Class of
Service (COS) basis.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Enable/Disable
All COS – Disable
1.
Enter 514.
Display: DND for DDI
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• The operator extension cannot reject the call regardless of setting.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
System Programming 4-113
4.7
COS Programming
Calling Line Identification Restriction
516
Description Enables or disables the Calling Line Identification Restriction
(CLIR) Service on a Class of Service (COS) basis.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Enable/Disable
All COS – Disable
1.
Enter 516.
Display: CLIR
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1-Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
4-114 System Programming
517 4.7
COS Programming
Connected Line Identification Restriction
Description Enables or disables the Connected Line Identification Restriction
(COLR) Service.
Selection
Default
Programming
• Enable/Disable
All COS – Disable
1.
Enter 517.
Display: COLR
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO.–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
System Programming 4-115
4.8
Extension Programming
EXtra Device Port
600
Description EXtra Device Port (XDP) allows a single line telephone (SLT) to be connected to the same jack as a proprietary telephone (PT) or DSS
Console. This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and the PT / DSS Console of the programmed jack work as independent extensions.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64,
( =all jacks)
• Enable/Disable
Default
Programming
All jacks – Disable
1.
Enter 600.
Display: XDP Assign
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
• Immediately after changing your assignment, changed setting may not work for a maximum of eight seconds.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
4-116 System Programming
601
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
4.8
Extension Programming
Class of Service
Programs each extension for a Class of Service (COS). The COS determines the call handling abilities of each extension.
A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per extension.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• COS number: 1 through 8
All jacks-1/2 – COS 1
1.
Enter 601.
Display: COS Assign
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01-1:COS1, COS1
4.
Enter a COS number for primary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
5.
Press
→
.
6.
Enter a COS number for secondary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services. Every extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS
Programming of programs [500] through [517] and [991].
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
Jack numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
System Programming 4-117
4.8
Extension Programming
Class of Service
(contd.)
601
• To assign all jacks to one COS, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Class of Service (COS)
4-118 System Programming
602 4.8
Extension Programming
Extension Group Assignment
Description Assigns each extension to an extension group. Extension groups are used for Group Call Pickup, Station Hunting, Uniform Call
Distribution and Paging – Group. This program is also used to assign all Voice Mail ports / Automated Attendant ports of your
Voice Processing System, if available, to an extension group.
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Extension group number: 1 through 8
Default
Programming
All jacks-1/2 – Extension group 1
1.
Enter 602.
Display: EXT Group Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01-1:EXG1
4.
Enter the extension group number.
To change the current entry, enter the new extension group number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eight extension groups. Each extension can only belong to one group.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one extension group, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Pickup, Group
Extension Group
Paging – Group
Station Hunting
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Voice Mail Integration
System Programming 4-119
4.8
Extension Programming 603-604
DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
A DIL 1:N line can be assigned to ring more than one extension.
All incoming calls from the programmed CO lines are directed to the specified extensions. These programs assign the extensions and the notification method for each CO line in both day and night modes.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• CO line number: KX-TD816: 01 through 08,
• Disab (disable) / Immdt (immediate ringing) / 1Rng (1 ring delay) / 3Rng (3 rings delay) / 6Rng (6 rings delay) / NoRng (no ring)
KX-TD1232: 01 through 24
( =all CO lines)
All jacks-1/2 – all CO lines – Immdt (Immediate ringing)
— Day / Night
1.
Enter a program address (603 for day or 604 for night).
Display example: DIL 1:N Asn Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01-1: CO01: Immdt
4.
Enter the CO line number.
You can also keep pressing
→ or
← until the desired CO line number is displayed.
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
4-120 System Programming
603-604 4.8
Extension Programming
DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
(contd.)
SELECT and the desired jack number.
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7.
9.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available. Jack numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3 or step 4. In these cases, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or for CO line 01.
• There are six notification methods:
(1) Immediate ringing: rings immediately
(2) 1 ring delay
(3) 3 rings delay
(4) 6 rings delay
(5) No ring: only the indicator flashes
(6) Disable: no incoming call
• When you change the jack number by pressing NEXT or PREV, the
CO line group number is not changed. Example #03-1:CO06.....Press
NEXT.....#03-2:CO06
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Direct In Lines (DIL)
Night Service
Ringing, Delayed
System Programming 4-121
4.8
Extension Programming 605-606
Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by an extension in both day and night modes. The extension users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned CO lines.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• CO line number: KX-TD816: 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232: 01 through 24
( =all CO lines)
• Enabl (enable) / Disab (disable)
All jacks-1/2 – all CO lines – Enabl — Day / Night
1.
Enter a program address (605 for day or 606 for night).
Display example: CO Out Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01-1:CO01:Enabl
4.
Enter the desired CO line number, or keep pressing
→ or
← until the desired CO line is displayed.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7.
9.
Press END.
4-122 System Programming
605-606 4.8
Extension Programming
Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
(contd.)
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
Jack numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3 or 4. In these cases, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or CO01.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing
Night Service
System Programming 4-123
4.8
Extension Programming 607-608
Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
These programs assign the extensions which will ring when a doorphone call is received during the day and night modes.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Doorphone number: KX-TD816 – 1, Disable,
KX-TD1232 – 1 or 2, Disable, two entries (max.)
Jack 01-1– 12; Other jacks – Disable (no doorphone) — Day /
Night
1.
Enter a program address (607 for day or 608 for night).
Display example: Doorphone in Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01-1:12
4.
Enter the doorphone numbers.
To assign no doorphone, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new doorphone numbers.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
• One doorphone can be installed in each system. In case of the KX-
TD1232, doorphone 1 is installed in the Master System, 2 in the Slave, if available.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, you can enter up to two doorphone numbers for each extension.
4-124 System Programming
4.8
Extension Programming 607-608
Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Doorphone Call
Night Service
System Programming 4-125
4.8
Extension Programming
Voice Mail Access Codes
609
Description Assigns a mailbox number for each extension, only if program
[990] “System Additional Information, Field (18)” is set to “free.”
Selection • Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Mailbox number: 16 digits (max.)
Default
Programming
All jacks – Not stored
1.
Enter 609.
Display: Mailbox ID Code
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01-1:Not Stored
4.
Enter a mailbox number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available. Jack numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
• The system supports a maximum of eight jacks (16 jacks during System
Connection*) for connection to a Voice Processing System as the Voice
Mail or Automated Attendant ports.
• Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits, consisting of 0 through 9, , # and PAUSE.
• To display parts of the code which have scrolled off the display, press
→ or
←
.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration
4-126 System Programming
610
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
4.8
Extension Programming
Department Codes
Assigns the department codes.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Department code: 5 digits (max.)
All jacks - Not stored
1.
Enter 610.
Display: Department Code
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (–2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01–1: Not Stored
4.
Enter a department code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new department
code.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• Each extension has one department code. Each code has a maximum of
5 digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
System Programming 4-127
4.8
Extension Programming
Department Codes
(contd.)
610
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Department Codes
4-128 System Programming
611 4.8
Extension Programming
Extension Connection Assignment
Description
Selection
Assigns whether the extension can perform all accesses or not.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (–1 / –2),
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (–1 / –2),
( =all jacks, -1=first part, -2=second part)
• Connect/No Connect
Default
Programming
All jacks - Connect
1.
Enter 611 .
Display: Ext Connection
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01-1 : Connect
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • The extension of the jack number 01 should be set to “Verbunden.”
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Extension Connection Assignment
System Programming 4-129
4.8
Extension Programming
Data Line Security
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
612
Sets or cancels the Data Line Security mode on an extension basis.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (–1 / –2),
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (–1 / –2),
( =all jacks, -1=first part, -2=second part)
• On/Off
All jacks - Off
1.
Enter 612.
Display: Data Mode
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (–2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display example: #01–1: Off
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Data Line Security
4-130 System Programming
613 4.8
Extension Programming
ISDN Class of Service
Description
Selection
Programs each ISDN port for a Class of Service (COS). The COS determines the call handling abilities of each port.
A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per port.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• COS number: 1 through 8
Default All ports – COS 1
Programming 1.
Enter 613.
Display: ISDN COS Assign
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:COS1,COS1
4.
Enter a COS number for primary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
5.
Press
→
.
6.
Enter a COS number for secondary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10.
Press END.
Conditions • There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services. Every ISDN extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming of programs [500] through [517] and [991].
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Class of Service (COS)
ISDN Extension
System Programming 4-131
4.8
Extension Programming
Department Codes of ISDN Port
614
Description
Selection
Assigns the department code of the ISDN port.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Department code: 5 digits (max.)
Default
Programming
All ports — Not stored
1.
Enter 614.
Display: ISDN Dept. Code
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : Port NO?->
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03: Not Stored
4.
Enter a department code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new code.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • Each port has one department code. Each code has a maximum of 5 digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Department Codes
ISDN Extension
4-132 System Programming
615-616 4.8
Extension Programming
Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment – Day/Night for ISDN Extension
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by an ISDN extension in both day and night modes. The extension users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned CO lines.
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 8,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Enabl (enable) / Disab (disable)
All ports – all CO lines – Enabl — Day / Night
1.
Enter a program address (615 for day or 616 for night).
Display example: CO Out(ISDN) Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?->
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:CO01:Enabl
4.
Enter the desired CO line number, or keep pressing
→ or
← until the desired CO line is displayed.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7.
9.
Press END.
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave, if available.
System Programming 4-133
4.8
Extension Programming 615-616
Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment – Day/Night for ISDN Extension
(contd.)
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 4. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO 01.
• When you change a port number by pressing NEXT or PREV, the CO line number is not changed.
Example #03:CO02.......Pressing NEXT....#04:CO02
Feature References Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing
ISDN Extension
Night Service
4-134 System Programming
4.8
Extension Programming
Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
†
617
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording the conversation after the call intercepted.
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64,
( =all jacks)
• Stop Rec / Keep Rec
All jacks = Stop Rec (Stop recording)
1.
Enter 617.
Display: LCS REC Mode
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?
→
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01:Stop Rec
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack number, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
Conditions
8.
Press END.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming 4-135
4.9
Resource Programming
SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
800
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Used to determine which calls will produce an SMDR printout.
• Outgoing calls: All (all calls) / Toll (toll calls only) /
Off (no printing)
• Incoming calls: On (all calls) / Off (no printing)
Outgoing calls – Off; Incoming calls – Off
1.
Enter 800.
Display: Duration Log
2.
Press NEXT to program outgoing calls.
Display: Outgoing: Off
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press NEXT to program incoming calls.
Display: Incoming: Off
6.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • It is necessary to connect a printer to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port provided on the system.
• After connecting a printer, printout will be started in 10 seconds.
• If “Toll” is selected, the system will print out all the calls starting from the numbers stored in programs [301]–[305] “TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6.”
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
4-136 System Programming
801 4.9
Resource Programming
SMDR Format
Description
Selection
Used to match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the printer. Page length determines the number of lines per page. Skip perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
• Page length (lines): 4 through 99
• Skip perforation (lines): 0 through 95
Page length – 66; Skip perforation – 0 Default
Programming 1.
Enter 801.
Display: SMDR Format
2.
Press NEXT to program page length.
Display example: Page Length:66
3.
Enter the page length.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new page length.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press NEXT to program skip perforation.
Display example: Skip Perf: 0
6.
Enter the skip perforation.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new skip perforation.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length.
• A title is positioned on the first three lines on every page.
• The programmed format becomes valid only if the Serial Interface (RS-
232C) cable is connected. If a printer is already connected, disconnect it and connect again. Otherwise the former format becomes valid.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Programming 4-137
4.9
Resource Programming
System Data Printout
802
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Starts or stops printing of the system data. All the current systemprogrammed data is printed out.
Start / Stop
Not applicable.
1.
Enter 802.
Display: System Data Dump
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Print-Out: Start
3.
Press STORE to start printing.
Printing starts.
To stop printing in the middle of printing, press SELECT and go to step 4.
When printing is completed, the display shows:
Display: Print-Out: Finish
4.
Press STORE.
Display: Print-Out:Stop
5.
Press END.
Conditions You may stop printing by pressing the ENDE button, while records are being printed out.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
4-138 System Programming
803 4.9
Resource Programming
Music Source Use
Description Assigns the music source to be used for Music on Hold and
Background Music (BGM).
Selection • Hold / BGM
• Music source number: KX-TD816 – 1 / 2 / No Use
KX-TD1232 – 1 through 4 / No Use
Default
Programming
Hold and BGM – Music 1
1.
Enter 803.
Display: Music Source Use
2.
Press NEXT to program Music on Hold.
Display example: Hold: Music1
3.
Enter a music source number.
To change the current entry, enter the new music source number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press NEXT to program HGM.
Display example: BGM: Music1
6.
Enter a music source number.
To change the current entry, enter the new music source number.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, Music sources 1 and 2 are connected to the
Master System, 3 and 4 are to the Slave, if available. Any music source can be used by either system.
• The system is provided with an internal music source. By default setting, internal music source is used as Music Source 1 for these systems. Program [990] “System Additional Information,” Field (20) is used to select external music source for Music 1.
• To disable music, press CLEAR at steps 3 and 6.
• Program [804] “External Pager BGM” is used to enable / disable BGM for each external pager.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Background Music (BGM)
Background Music (BGM) – External
Music on Hold
System Programming 4-139
4.9
Resource Programming
External Pager BGM
804
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Used to determine which external pagers will receive Background
Music (BGM). BGM – External is turned on and off by an operator.
• External pager number: KX-TD816 – 1 / 2
KX-TD1232 – 1 through 4
• Disable (sends no BGM) / Enable (sends BGM)
All external pagers – Disable
1.
Enter 804.
Display: Ext-Pag BGM
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Pager NO?->
3.
Enter an external pager number.
To enter pager number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: Pager 1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another pager, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired external pager number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions • In case of the KX-TD1232, external pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the
Master System, 3 and 4 in the Slave, if available.
• Program [803] “Music Source Use” is used to select the music source to be used for BGM.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Background Music (BGM) – External
4-140 System Programming
805 4.9
Resource Programming
External Pager Confirmation Tone
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Used to remove the confirmation tone for external pagers. The default setting sends confirmation tone 2 to the external pagers before paging is broadcast. This programming applies to all the external pagers.
On/Off
On
1.
Enter 805.
Display: Ext-Pag Act-Tone
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Tone: On
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions In case of the KX-TD1232, external pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the
Master System, 3 and 4 in the Slave, if available.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Confirmation Tone
Paging – All
Paging – External
System Programming 4-141
4.9
Resource Programming 806-807
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2
Description Assigns the communication parameters for the Serial Interface (RS-
232C) for Port 1 (for KX-TD816 and Master System of KX-
TD1232 ) or Port 2 (Slave System of KX-TD1232).
New line code: Select the code for your printer or personal computer. If your printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with carriage return, select “CR.” If not, select “CR+LF.”
Baudrate: A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system to the printer or personal computer.
Wortlänge: A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character.
Parität: A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer.
Stop bits: A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer.
Selection • New line code: CR+LF / CR
(CR=Carriage Return, LF=Line Feed)
• Baud Rate (baud): 150 / 300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600
• Word length (bits): 7 / 8
• Parity bit: None / Mark / Space / Even / Odd
• Stop bit length (bits): 1 / 2
Default New line code = CR+LF; Baud Rate = 9600; Word length= 8;
Parity bit= NONE; Stop Bit = 1 — Port 1 / Port 2
Programming 1.
Enter a program address (806 for Port 1 or 807 for Port 2).
Display example: RS232C Paramet.1
2.
Press NEXT to program new line code.
Display example: NL-Code: CR+LF
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press NEXT to program baud rate.
Display example: Baud Rate: 9600
6.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4-142 System Programming
806-807 4.9
Resource Programming
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2
(contd.)
7.
Press STORE.
8.
Press NEXT to program word length.
Display example: Word Length: 8bits
9.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
10.
Press STORE.
11.
Press NEXT to program parity bit.
Display example: Parity: None
12.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
13.
Press STORE.
14.
Press NEXT to program stop bit.
Display example: Stop Bit: 1bit
15.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
16.
Press STORE.
17.
Press END.
Conditions • The following combinations are invalid.
Parity Word Length Stop Bit
Mark
Space
Space
8
8
8
2
1
2
• The program address of the out-of-service system port is unacceptable.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Programming 4-143
4.9
Resource Programming
Floating Number Assignment
813
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
Conditions
4-144
Assigns the floating numbers for Digital Test Access (DTA)
External Pager, External Ringer, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Pilot Number, and the modem*. These numbers can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
• Floating station: Pager1 / Pager2 / Pager3* / Pager4* / UCD
Grp1 / UCD Grp2 / UCD Grp3 / UCD Grp4 / UCD Grp5 /
UCD Grp6 / UCD Grp7 / UCD Grp8 / MODEM* / DTA /
Ringer1 / Ringer2*
• Floating number: 2 through 4 digits
Pager1=296; Pager2=297; Pager3*=396; Pager4*=397;
UCD Grp1 through 8= 281 through 288; MODEM*=299;
DTA=399; Riger1=298; Ringer2*=398
1.
Enter 813.
Display: FLT EXT NO.
2.
Press NEXT to program Pager 1.
Display example: Pager1: 296
To program another floating station, keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed.
3.
Enter a floating number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new floating number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
To program another floating station, keep pressing NEXT or
PREV until the desired floating station is displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5.
7.
Press END.
• A floating number is composed of two through four numerical digits, 0
through 9.
• The leading one or two digits of the floating numbers are subject to program [100] “Flexible Numbering, (01) through (16) 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks.”
• Floating numbers and extension numbers should be unique. Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid. Valid entry example: 10 and 11, 10 and 110; Invalid entry example: 10 and 106,
210 and 21.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
System Programming * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
813 4.9
Resource Programming
Floating Number Assignment
(contd.)
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Floating Station
System Programming 4-145
4.9
Resource Programming
Modem Standard*
Description
Selection
Default
Assigns the modem standard used by your modem.
BELL / CCITT
CCITT
Programming 1.
Enter 814.
Display: MODEM Standard
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: MODEM:CCITT
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions None
Feature References Section 3, Features,
System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer
814
4-146 System Programming * : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
4.10
Option Programming
System Additional Information
Description Adds the following programming items, if required.
Area 1 There are fourteen fields available in Area 1 as follows:
990
Display example
0010100010110001
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Field number (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) (4)(44)(34)(33)(32)(3) (2) (1)
Area 2 There are twelve fields available in Area 2 as follows:
Display example
Field number
1110010000101100
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(unused) (22) (21) (20)(19)(18) (17)(16) (15)(14)(13)(12)(11)
Area 3 [1] through [16] below match CO lines 1 through 16:
Display example
0000000000000000
CO number
Field number
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
[16] [15][14][13][12][11][10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
↓
(23)*
Area 4 [17] through [24] below match CO lines 17 through 24:
Display example
CO number
Field number
1111111100000000
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(31)(30)(29)(28) (27)(26)(25)(24)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
[24][23][22] [21][20][19][18][17]
↓
(23)*
4-147 System Programming *: CO numbers [9] through [24] in the field number
(23) are available for KX-TD1232 only.
990
Area 5
4.10
Option Programming
System Additional Information
(contd.)
There are ten fields available in Area 5 as follows:
Display example
Field number
1111100111111111
↓
(unused)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(45) (43)(42)(41)(40) (39)(38)(37)(36)(35)
Explanation for Areas 1 and 2
Field
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Description
Sound source during transfer.
Selection
0 : ringback tone
1 : Music on Hold
Default References
1
0
• CALL
TRANSFER
FEATURES
• Music on Hold
Call Hold Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly and then placing down the handset (during an outside line call (single line telephones only).
Reserved
Enables or disables the dial tone between obtaining a CO line and dialing the phone number when using the one-touch dial, redial or speed dial function.
Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly
(single line telephones only).
0 : Consultation
Hold
1 : disconnection
0 : disable
1 : enable
Sets the duration of the DTMF signals sent to the Voice Processing System (VPS) ports.
Sets the time the system waits before sending
DTMF signals (such as a mailbox number) to
VPS after VPS answers a call.
Sets the time the system waits before sending DTMF signals (programmed in
[113]) to VPS after the VPS calls an extension.
Assigns whether the system turns off the
Message Waiting lamp or the VPS does when the user hears a message recorded in a mailbox.
0 : Consultation
Hold
1 : disconnection
0 : 80 ms
1 : 160 ms
00 : 0.5 s
01 : 1.0 s
10 : 1.5 s
11 : 2.0 s
00 : 0.5 s
01 : 1.0 s
10 : 1.5 s
11 : 2.0 s
0 : system
1 : VPS
1
0
0
10
10
0
None
Call Hold
Voice Mail
Integration
Voice Mail
Integration
Voice Mail
Integration
• Message
Waiting
• Voice Mail
Integration
4-148 System Programming
4.10
Option Programming
System Additional Information
(contd.)
990
Field
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
Description Selection
Reserved
If an outside party is transferred and unanswered, assigns whether Transfer
Recall occurs at the transfer originating extension or at Operator.
Reserved
Allows you to remove confirmation tone 4.
By default, a beep tone sounds when a threeparty conference is started / ended.
Reversed
Reserved
Allows you to remove Confirmation Tone 3.
This tone is sent when a conversation is established just after dialing the feature numbers for accessing the following features: Call Pickup, Paging, Paging
Answer, TAFAS Answer, Hold Retrieve and
Call Park Retrieve.
Reserved
Assigns if an extension’s mailbox number is substituted by the extension number or it is programmable (free). If a call is forwarded or rerouted to the VPS, this system automatically transmits the mailbox number to the VPS to specify the user’s mailbox. To make it programmable, select “1 (free),” then assign the number in program [609]
“Voice Mail Access Codes.”
Assigns the first display of a large display proprietary telephone (KX-T7235) in
Station Speed Dialing.
0 : extension
1 : Operator
0 : disable
1 : enable
0 : disable
1 : enable
0 : extension number
1 : free
0 : names
1 : numbers
Default References
0 Call Transfer,
Unscreened – to
Extension
1 Confirmation
Tone
1 Confirmation
Tone
0 Voice Mail
Integration
0 Special Features for KX-T7235 —
Station Speed
Dialing
System Programming 4-149
990 4.10
Option Programming
System Additional Information
(contd.)
Field
(20)
Description
Assigns the source of Music Source 1 for
Music on Hold and BGM.
Selection
0 : internal music source
1 : external music source
Default
0
References
• Background
Music (BGM)
• Background
Music (BGM)
– External
• Music on Hold
(21)
(22)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(44)
Reserved
Selects intercom dial tone frequency.
0 : normal
1 : distinctive
Reserved
Selects the destination during the day mode, when the operator number is sent as a Direct
Dialing In number.
Selects the destination during the night mode, when the operator number is sent as a
Direct Dialing In number.
Assigns the operation when the Master and
Slave system of KX-TD1232 are disconnected.
0 : DIL 1:N
1 : Operator
0 : DIL 1:N
1 : Operator
0 : Reset automatically
1 : Not reset
0
1
1
0
None
Direct Dialing In
(DDI)
Direct Dialing In
(DDI)
None
Explanation for Areas 3 and 4
Field
(23)
(24)
(25)
Description
This field is provided to assign PAD Switch
Control (volume control of received calls on a
CO line). This can be assigned per CO line.
The CO numbers [1] through [8] correspond to
CO lines 1 through 8 for KX-TD816 and CO numbers [1] through [24] correspond to CO lines 1 through 24 respectively.
Prohibits or allows a call originated by an AA port of VPS to another AA port.
Reserved
Selection
0 : 0 dB
1 : -3 dB
0 : prohibit
1 : allow
Default
0
References
None
1
1
Voice Mail
Integration
None
(26) Enables or disables the SMDR printout of the secret dial numbers.
0 : disable
1 : enable
(27) Enables or disables the Digital Test Access.
(28-31) Reserved
0 : enable
1 : disable
1
1
Station Message
Detail Recording
(SMDR)
None
4-150 System Programming
4.10
Option Programming
System Additional Information
(contd.)
990
Explanation for Area 5
Field
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
Description
Assigns the displayed language when in
System Programming or when printing out the data to SMDR.
Assigns whether the system sends the Follow
On ID code to the VPS or not, when a call is directed to the VPS by Call Forwarding.
Assigns whether the system sends the Follow
On ID code to the VPS or not, when a call is directed to the VPS by Intercept Routing.
Assigns how an SLT user replies to a message left by the Message Waiting feature.
Assigns how to treat the extension user who reaches the pre-assigned limit of the Budget
Management feature.
Selection
0 : English
1 : German
0 : disable
1 : enable
1 : disable
0 : enable
1 : off-hook
0 : off-hook and feature number
1 : sends an alarm sound
0 : sends an alarm sound and then disconnects the line in fifteen seconds.
1 : disable
0 : enable
(41)
(42)
(43)
(45)
Assigns whether the data (the date and room number) is printed out or not when a guest checks-in and checks-out.
Assigns whether to send an absent message,
No.6- 9, to an extension or to output it to the printer when the feature number is dialed.
Outputting the message to the printer is useful when informing a receptionist of the cleaning status of a room or the total of the minibar at the hotel.
Assigns whether or not the new page will start whenever printing out the data in the
Hotel Application feature.
Assigns whether or not to print out the data when the system receives a call and a call is answered.
Assigns whether or not to add an extension number to a subscriber's number for Calling
Line Identification Presentation and
Connected Line Identification Presentation.
0 : SMDR (printer)
1 : extension
1 : disable
0 : enable
1 : disable
0 : enable
1 : adds
0 : does not add
Default References
1 Multilingual
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Voice Mail
Integration
Voice Mail
Integration
Message Waiting
Budget
Management
HOTEL
APPLICATION
• Absent
Message
Capability
• HOTEL
APPLICATION
None
None
• Calling Line
Identification
Restriction
(CLIR)
• Connected Line
Identification
Restriction
(COLR)
System Programming 4-151
990 4.10
Option Programming
System Additional Information
(contd.)
Selection
Default
Programming
• Area code: 01 (area 1) / 02 (area 2) / 03 (area 3) / 04 (area 4) /
05 (area 5)
Field number : 1 through 22, 32 through 34, 44
(for areas 1 and 2)
23 through 31 (for areas 3 and 4)
35 through 43, 45 (for area 5)
• Selection: See “Selection” shown in the lists for each area.
See “Default” shown in the lists.
1.
Enter 990.
Display: System Add Inf.
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Area NO?->
3.
Enter an area code.
Display example: 0010100011111001
4.
Keep pressing
← or
→ to move the cursor to the desired field.
5.
Enter your selection.
To change the current entry, press STORE and the new selection.
6.
To program another field, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
To program another area, press SELECT and the desired
area code.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10.
Press END.
Conditions None
Feature References See “References” shown in the lists.
4-152 System Programming
4.10
Option Programming
COS Additional Information
991
Description
Selection
Default
Programming
(1) Enables or disables the Call Forwarding – Follow Me feature on a COS basis.
The field (1) below is used to enter your selection.
Display example
Field number
1111111111111111
↓
(unused)
↓ ↓
(1) (unused)
• COS number : 1 through 8, ( =all COS)
• Selection for field (1): 0: disable / 1: enable
Field 1: All COS – 1
1.
Enter 991.
Display: COS Add Inf.
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?->
3.
Enter a COS number.
Display example: 1111111111111111
4.
Keep pressing
← or
→ to move the cursor to the desired field.
5.
Enter your selection
To change the current entry, press STORE and the new selection.
6.
To program another field, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
To program another COS, press SELECT and the desired
COS number.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10.
Press END.
System Programming 4-153
991 4.10
Option Programming
COS Additional Information
(contd.)
Conditions To assign all COS numbers to one selection, press the key at step 3.
Feature References Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – Follow Me
Class of Service (COS)
4-154 System Programming
Section 5
List
This section lists tone and ring tone and default values of
System Programming.
5.1
Tone / Ring Tone
<TONE>
Confirmation Tone 1
Confirmation Tone 2
Confirmation Tone 3
Confirmation Tone 4
Dial Tone 1
Dial Tone 2
Dial Tone 3
Dial Tone 4
1 sec
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
Ringback Tone 1
Ringback Tone 2
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Tone
Warning Tone
5 sec
Message Waiting Tone
(SLT)
5-2 List
5.1
Tone / Ring Tone
<TONE>
Hold Alarm
Call Waiting Tone 1
(outside/intercom)
15 sec
5 sec
Call Waiting Tone 2
(outside)
Call Waiting Tone 2
(intercom)
<RING TONE>
Outside Calls /
Outside Hold Recall
Intercom Calls /
Intercom Hold Recall
Callback Ringing
(Camp-On Recall)
Doorphone Calls /
Timed Reminder
1 sec
5 sec
External Sensor
List 5-3
5.2
Default Values
Address Program
Manager Programming
[000] Date and Time Set
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
[003] Extension Number Set
[004]
[005]
[006]
[007]
Extension Name Set
Flexible CO Button Assignment
Operator / Manager Extension
Assignment—Day/Night
DSS Console Port and Paired
Telephone Assignment
Default
1 Jan ’94 SAT 00:00
Not Stored
Not Stored
• KX-TD816
Jack 01-1 through 16-1=201 through 216
Jack 01-2 through 16-2=301 through 316
• KX-TD1232
Jack 01-1 through 64-1=201 through 264
Jack 01-2 through 64-2=301 through 364
Not Stored
• KX-TD816
For KX-T7230
All Jacks – CO button 1 through 8 = Single
CO 01 through 08, CO buttons 9 through 24
= Not Stored; Ring tone type 2
For KX-T7235
All Jacks – CO button 1 through 8 = Single
CO 01 through 08, CO buttons 9 through 12
= Not Stored; Ring tone type 2
For KX-T7250
All Jacks – CO button 1 through 6 = Single
CO 01 through 06; Ring tone type 2
• KX-TD1232
For KX-T7230
All Jacks – CO buttons 1 through 24 =
Single-CO01 through 24; Ring tone type2
For KX-T7235
All Jacks – CO buttons 1 through 12 =
Single-CO01 through 12; Ring tone type2
For KX-T7250
All Jacks – CO button 1 through 6 = Single
CO 01 through 06, ; Ring tone type 2
Operator 1=Port 01—Day/Night
Operator 2 Not Stored—Day/Night
Manager=Not Stored—Day/Night
Not Stored
5-4 List
5.2
Default Values
Address
[008]
[009]
Program
Absent Messages
Emergency Dial Number Set
0 Franc
0, 0%
All Ports – Not Stored
All Ports – Not Stored
All Ports – 0 FR
Default
1: Will Return Soon 2: Gone Home
3: At EXT %%%; 4: Back at %%:%%
5: Out Until %%/%%; 6: In a Meeting
7 through 9: Not Stored
1: 0117, 2: 0118, 3: 0144
4 through 8: Not Stored
[010] Budget Management
[011] Charge Margin and Tax Rate
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port
System Programming
[100] Flexible Numbering
[101]
[102]
Language Assignment
Day / Night Service Starting Time
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group
Assignment
[105] Account Codes
[106] Station Hunting Type
[107] System Password
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
[109] Expansion Card/Unit Type
[110]
[111]
Network type Assignment
DDI Removed Digit / Added
Number Assignment
[112] DDI Number for Operator
Assignment
[113] VM Status DTMF Set
See pages 4-38 and 4-39.
GERMAN
Every Day of the Week – Day=9:00 /
Night=17:00
12345678
Not Stored
All Extension Groups=Disable
1234
Enable
KX-TD816; S;E1
KX-TD1232; Master and Slave=S;E1;E2
NET2
Removed digit: 0, Added number: not stored
0
RBT=1; BT=2; ROT=3; DND=4; Answer=5;
Disconnect=#9; Confirm =9; FWD VM RBT=6;
FWD VM BT=7; FWD EXT RBT=8
[114] VM Command DTMF Set
[115] Adjust Time
[116] ROM Version Display
[117] Charge Display Selection
[118] Charge Verfication Assignment
[119] Charge Verfication ID Code Set
[120] Operator Queue
LV MSG=H; GETMSG= H; AA-SVC=#8;
VM-SVC=#6
1:00
Not Applicable
Meter
Enable
1234
Queue: 8, H-UP: 4
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only List 5-5
5.2
Default Values
Address Program
[121] Pulse Dial Reception Assignment
[122] Automatic Door Open Assignment
[123] Hotel Application
[125] Assignment of Denomination
† [126] Voice Mail Number Assignment
† [127] Voice Mail Extension Number
Assignment
Default
Puls: Enable
Disable
Disable
FR
All jacks—Not Stored
VM-01=265, VM-02=266, VM-03=267,
VM-04=268, VM-05=269, VM-06=270,
VM-07=271, VM-08=272, VM-09=273,
VM-10=274, VM-11=275, VM-12=276,
ALL voice mail numbers=EXG 1 † [128] Voice Mail Extension Group
Assignment
Timer Programming
[200] Hold Recall Time
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
[203] Intercept Time
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time
[213] External Relay Connecting Time
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
TRS Programming
[301]–[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for
Levels 2 through 6
[306]–[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for
Levels 2 through 6
CO Line Programming
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
60 s
12 rings
3 rings
12 rings
1 s
10 s
10 s
5 times
6 (60 seconds)
5 s
10 min
Location 01 in program [301]:
Others: Not Stored
Not Stored
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension—Day/Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension—Day/Night
[411] Host PBX Access Codes
[418] External Ringer Assignment
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[420] Direct Dialing In
All CO Lines – Connect
CO01=TRG 1;CO02=TRG 2;
CO03=TRG 3;CO04=TRG 4;
CO05=TRG 5;CO06=TRG 6;
CO07=TRG 7;CO08=TRG 8 (for KX-TD816)
CO08 through CO24=TRG 8
(for KX-TD1232)
All CO Lines=Disable—Day/Night
All CO Line Groups=Disable—Day/Night
Not Stored
All CO Lines—Disable
Not Stored
5-6 List
5.2
Default Values
Address Program
[421] CO Line Name Assignment
[422] ISDN Port Type
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[424] ISDN Configuration
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode
[426] ISDN TEI Mode
[427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber
Number
[428] ISDN Extension Progress Tone
COS Programming
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level—Day/
Night
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level for
System Speed Dialing—Day/Night
[511] Door Opener Access
[512] External Relay Access
[513] Night Service Access
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In
Call
[516] Calling Line Identification
Restriction
[517] Connected Line Identification
Restriction
Extension Programming
[600] EXtra Device Port
[601] Class of Service
[602] Extension Group Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed
Ringing—Day/Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line
Assignment—Day/Night
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment
—Day/Night
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes
[610] Department Codes
Default
All CO Lines—Enable
Not Stored
All Ports – CO
All Ports – Permanent
All Ports – Point
All Ports – Permanent
All Ports – Fix 0
All Ports – Disable
All Ports – Disable
All COS=Level 1—Day/Night
All COS=Enable
All COS=Disable
All COS=Disable
All COS=Enable
All COS=Disable
All COS=Option
All COS=Level 1—Day/Night
All COS–Enable
All COS–Enable
All COS–Enable
All COS–Disable
All COS–Disable
All COS–Disable
All Jacks=Disable
All Jacks-1/2=COS 1
All Jacks-1/2=Extension Group 1
All Jacks-1/2=All CO Lines= Immdt
(Immediate Ringing)—Day/Night
All Jacks-1/2=All CO Lines=Enable—Day/
Night
Jack 01-1= All Doorphones (1,2); Other
Jacks=Disable—Day/Night
Not Stored
List 5-7
5.2
Default Values
Address Program
[611] Extension Connection Assignment
[612] Data Line Security
[613] ISDN Class of Service
[614] Department Codes of ISDN Port
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line
Assignment—Day/Night for ISDN
Extension
† [617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode
Assignment
Resource Programming
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call
Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format
[802] System Data Printout
[803] Music Source Use
[804] External Pager BGM
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[806]–[807] Serial Interface (RS-232C)
Parameters—Port 1/Port 2*
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Default
Not Stored
All Jacks–Connect
All Jacks–Off
All Ports – COS 1
All Ports – Not Stored
All Ports – All CO Lines – Enabl—Day/
Night
All Jacks – Stop Rec (Stop Recording)
Outgoing Calls=Off;
Incoming Calls=Off
Page Length=66; Skip Perforation=0
Not Applicable
Hold and BGM=Music 1
All External Pagers=Disable
On
New Line Code=CR+LF; Baud rate=9600;
Word length=8; Parity bit= NONE; Stop
Bits=1 — Port1/Port2*
Pager 1=296, Pager 2=297; Pager 3*=396;
Pager 4*=397; MODEM*=299, UCD Grp 1 through 8=281 through 288; DTA=399;
Ringer 1=298; Ringer 2*=398
*[814] Modem Standard
Option Programming
[990] System Additional Information
[991] COS Additional Information
CCITT
See pages 4-147 through 4-152.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic
Voice Processing System (one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
5-8 List *: Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Section 6
Troubleshooting
This section provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting.
6.1
Troubleshooting
6.1.1
Installation
PROBLEM
Extension does not operate.
PROBABLE CAUSE
Bad printed circuit board
(Extension Card).
Bad connection between the system and extension.
Take that extension and plug it into the same extension port using a short telephone cord. If the telephone does not work, connection between the system and the extension must be repaired.
Bad extension.
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Exchange printed circuit board for another printed circuit board.
Take that extension and plug it into another extension port that is working. If the telephone does not work, replace the phone.
Press the Reset Button.
Improper reset operation.
Noise in external paging.
Volume distortion from external music source.
Speed Dialing or One-
Touch Dialing does not function.
Induced noise on the wire between the system and the amplifier.
Use a shielded cable as the connection wire between the system and amplifier. A short shielded cable is recommended.
Excessive input level from external music source.
Decrease the output level of the external music source by using the volume control on the music source.
Bad programming.
Enter the CO line access number
(0, 81 through 88) into programming.
ISDN Line does not operate properly.
ISDN Line is installed only in the Slave system.
Move the ISDN card to master system.
6-2 Troubleshooting
6.1
Troubleshooting
6.1.2
Connection
Connection between the system and a proprietary telephone:
Can you dial an extension?
No
CAUSE
The T/R is connected to the D1/D2.
SOLUTION
Use the correct cord (inner 2 wires are for T/R and the outer 2 wires are for D1/D2).
D1
T
R
D2
•
•
•
•
System
• D1
• T
• R
• D2 extension
Connection between the KX-TD1232 and a single line telephone:
CAUSE
The T/R is connected to the D1/D2.
SOLUTION
Use the correct cord (inner 2 wires are for T/R).
D1 •
T
R •
•
D2 •
System
•
• T
• R
• extension
Yes
(Continued to the following page.)
Connection between the KX-TD1232 and a single line telephone that is polarity-sensitive:
CAUSE
The “T” is connected to the “R.” Reverse the connections of the T/R.
SOLUTION
D1
T
R
D2
•
•
•
•
System
•
• T
• R
• extension
Troubleshooting 6-3
6.1
Troubleshooting
(Continued from the previous page.)
Can you dial out on a CO line?
No
Connection between the central office and the system:
CO lines are connected to the T1/T2.
•
•
CO line
CAUSE
• T1
• R1
• T2
• R2
System
SOLUTION
Reconnect the CO lines to the T1/R1 or T2/R2 of the telephone jack using 2conductor wiring.
CO lines are connected to the T2/R1.
•
•
CO line
• T1
• R1
• T2
• R2
System
6.1.3
Operation
PROBLEM
• When using the speakerphone mode with a PT,
KX-T7230/
KX-T7235/KX-T7250 nothing is audible.
PROBABLE CAUSE
• The “HEADSET” mode is selected by Station
Programming,“Handset/
Headset Selection.”
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
• When the headset is not used, select the “HANDSET” mode by
Station Programming.
The unit does not ring.
• The Ringer Volume
Selector is set to “OFF.”
• Set to “HIGH” or “LOW.”
6-4 Troubleshooting
6.1
Troubleshooting
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE
• During system connection operation for KX TD1232, originating an intercom/ outside call from a system to the other system is not possible.
• The indicators “System
Link Down” is displayed on the proprietary telephone of Operator 1.
Interface between the systems is disconnected.
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Connect the interface between the systems and press the Reset Button on both systems.
Originating an outside call,
Call Transfer, or Conference cannot be performed.
The corresponding CO button does not exist on the proprietary telephone.
Program the CO button. See
Section 4.2 [005] “Flexible CO
Button Assignment.”
6.1.4
Using Reset Button
If the system does not operate properly, use the Reset Button.
(If Master and Slave Systems are in operation by System
Connection for KX-TD1232, reset both systems.)
Before using the Reset Button, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.
Notes:
(a) When the System Clear Switch is set to “NORMAL,” pressing the Reset Button causes the following:
1. Camp-On is cleared.
2. Calls on Hold are terminated.
3. Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated.
4. Calls in progress are terminated.
5. Call Park is cleared.
Other data stored in memory except the above are not cleared.
(b) When the System Clear Switch is set to the “CLEAR” position, you must press the Reset Button with caution, because all data stored in memory will be cleared by the following operation: pressing the Reset Button and setting the System Clear Switch to the “ NORMAL” position while the Power Indicator is flashing(approximately within 10 seconds).
Troubleshooting 6-5
6.1
Troubleshooting
Operation
(A) If the system does not operate properly,
1. Make sure that the System Clear Switch is set to the
“NORMAL” position.
2. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool.
(B) If the system still does not operate properly,
1. Set the System Clear Switch to the “CLEAR” position.
2. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool.
3. Return the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL” position while the Power Indicator is flashing (approximately within 10 seconds).
Note: As a result of this measure, all the programmed data will be cleared.
(C) If the system still does not work, unplug the system and plug it again after five minutes.
(D) If the system still does not work,
1. Unplug the system.
2. Set the System Clear Switch to the “CLEAR” position.
3. Plug the system.
4. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool.
5. Set the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL” position while the Power Indicator is flashing (approximately within 10 seconds).
(E) If the system still does not work, unplug the system. Then consult an authorized service person.
6-6 Troubleshooting
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Central P.O. Box 288, Osaka 530-91, Japan
Printed in Japan PSQX1070ZA KW1195KM0

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Call Forwarding
- Call Hold
- Intercom Calling
- Automatic Callback
- Music on Hold
- Direct Station Selection
- System Speed Dialing
- Account Code Entry
- Toll Restriction
- Background Music